class 7 logic puzzles

40
lSAT 101: CORE CONCEPTS 10 Order Games Ouestions 1-7 A closet contains exactly six hangers-I. 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6-hanging, in that order, from left to right. It also contains exactly six dresses-one gauze, one linen, one polyester, one rayon, one silk, and one wool-a different dress on each of the hangers, in an order satisfying the following conditions: The gauze dress is on a lower-numbered hanger than the polyester dress. The rayon dress is on hanger 1 or hanger 6. Either the wool dress or the silk dress is on hanger 3. The linen dress hangs immediately to the right of the silk dress. I. Which one of the foll.owing could be an accurate matching of the hangers to the fabrics of the dresses that hang on them? (A) I: wool; 2: gauze; 3: silk; 4: linen; 5: polyester; 6: rayon (8) I: rayon; 2: wool; 3: gauze; 4: silk; 5: linen; 6: polyester (C) I: polyester; 2: gauze; 3: wool; 4: silk; 5: linen; 6: rayon (D) 1: linen; 2: silk; 3: wool; 4: gauze; 5: polyester; 6: rayon (E) I: gauze; 2: rayon; 3: silk; 4: linen; 5: wool; 6: polyester 2. If both the silk dress and the gauze dress are on odd- numbered hangers. then which one of the following could be true? (A) The polyester dress is on hanger I. (B) The wool dress is on hanger 2. (C) The polyester dress is on hanger 4. (D) The linen dress is on hanger 5. (E) The wool dress is on hanger 6. 3. If the silk dress is on an even-numbered hanger, which one of the following could be on the hanger immediately to its left? (A) the gauze dress (8) the linen dress (C) the polyester dress (D) the rayon dress (E) the wool dress 4. If the polyester dress is on hanger 2, then which one of the following must be true? (A) The silk dress is on hanger I. (8) The wool dress is on hanger 3. (C) The linen dress is on hanger 4. (D) The linen dress is on hanger 5. (E) The rayon dress is on hanger 6. 5. Which one of the following CANNOT be true ? (A) The linen dress hangs immediately next to the gauze dress. (8) The polyester dress hangs immediately to the right of the rayon dress. (C) The rayon dress hangs immediately to the left of the wool dress. (D) The silk dress is on a lower-numbered hanger than the gauze dress. (E) The wool dress is on a higher-numbered hanger th an the rayon dress. 6. Which one of the following CANNOT hang immediately next to the rayon dress? (A) the gauze dress ( 8) the linen dress (C) the polyester dress (D) the silk dress (E) the wool dress 7. Assume that the original condition that the linen dress hangs immediately to the right of the silk dress is replaced by the condition that the wool dress hangs immediately to the right of the silk dress. If all the other initial conditions remain in effect, which one of the following must be false? (A) The linen dress is on hanger I. (8) The gauze dress is on hanger 2. (C) The wool dress is on hanger 4. (D) The silk dress is on hanger 5. (E) The polyester dress is on hanger 6. B I © The Princeton Review. Inc .

Upload: tim-ricchuiti

Post on 12-Jan-2016

193 views

Category:

Documents


7 download

DESCRIPTION

logic puzzles

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

10 Order Games Ouestions 1-7

A closet contains exactly six hangers-I 2 3 4 5 and 6-hanging in that order from left to right It also contains exactly six dresses-one gauze one linen one polyester one rayon one silk and one wool-a different dre ss on each of the hangers in an order satisfying the following conditions

The gauze dress is on a lower-numbered hanger than the polyester dress

The rayon dress is on hanger 1 or hanger 6 Either the wool dress or the silk dress is on hanger 3 The linen dress hangs immediately to the right of the silk

dress

I Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the hangers to the fabrics of the dresses that hang on them

(A) I wool 2 gauze 3 silk 4 linen 5 polyester 6 rayon

(8) I rayon 2 wool 3 gauze 4 silk 5 linen 6 polyester

(C) I polyester 2 gauze 3 wool 4 silk 5 linen 6 rayon

(D) 1 linen 2 silk 3 wool 4 gauze 5 polyester 6 rayon

(E) I gauze 2 rayon 3 silk 4 linen 5 wool 6 polyester

2 If both the silk dress and the gauze dress are on oddshynumbered hangers then which one of the following could be true

(A) The polyester dress is on hanger I (B) The wool dress is on hanger 2 (C) The polyester dress is on hanger 4 (D) The linen dress is on hanger 5 (E) The wool dress is on hanger 6

3 If the silk dress is on an even-numbered hanger which one of the following could be on the hanger immediately to its left

(A) the gauze dress (8) the linen dress (C) the polyester dress (D) the rayon dress (E) the wool dress

4 If the polyester dress is on hanger 2 then which one of the following must be true

(A) The silk dress is on hanger I (8) The wool dress is on hanger 3 (C) The linen dress is on hanger 4 (D) The linen dress is on hanger 5 (E) The rayon dress is on hanger 6

5 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) The linen dress hangs immediately next to the gauze dress

(8) The polyester dress hangs immediately to the right of the rayon dress

(C) The rayon dress hangs immediately to the left of the wool dress

(D) The silk dress is on a lower-numbered hanger than the gauze dress

(E) The wool dress is on a higher-numbered hanger than the rayon dress

6 Which one of the following CANNOT hang immediately next to the rayon dress

(A) the gauze dress (8) the linen dress (C) the polyester dress (D) the silk dress (E) the wool dress

7 Assume that the original condition that the linen dress hangs immediately to the right of the silk dress is replaced by the condition that the wool dress hangs immediately to the right of the silk dress If all the other initial conditions remain in effect which one of the following must be false

(A) The linen dress is on hanger I (8) The gauze dress is on hanger 2 (C) The wool dress is on hanger 4 (D) The silk dress is on hanger 5 (E) The polyester dress is on hanger 6

B I copy The Princeton Review Inc

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

There are six groups in this years Civic Parade firefighters gymnasts jugglers musicians puppeteers and veterans Each group marches as a unit the groups are ordered from first at the front of the parade to sixth at the back The following conditions apply

At least two groups march behind the puppeteers but ahead of the musicians

Exactly one group marches behind the firefighters but ahead of the veterans

The gymnasts are the first third or fifth group

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the groups in the Civic Parade in order from first to last

(A) firefighters puppeteers veterans musicians gymnasts jugglers

gymnasts puppeteers jugglers musicians firefighters veterans

veterans puppeteers gymnasts jugglers musicians

puppeteers gymnasts firefighters musicians veterans

(E) musicians veterans jugglers firefighters gymnasts puppeteers

9 If the gymnasts march ahead of the veterans then which one of the following could be the fourth group

(A) gymnasts (B) jugglers

musicians puppeteers

(E) veterans

10 If the veterans march immediately behind the puppeteers then which one of the following could be the second

(A) firefighters (B) gymnasts (C) (D) musicians

veterans

11 If the jugglers are the fifth group then which one of the following must be true

(A) The puppeteers are the first group (B) The are the first group (C) The veterans are the second group (D) The gymnasts are the third group (E) The musicians are the sixth group

12 Which one of the follOWing groups CANNOT march immediately behind the gymnasts

(A) firefighters (B) jugglers (C) musicians (D) puppeteers

veterans

12 I ~ The Princeon Aeyiew lnc

UNIT 1 -

10 Order Games Questions 1-5

Six racehorses-K L M N 0 and P-will be assigned to six positions arranged in a straight line and numbered consecutively I through 6 The horses are assigned to the positions Olle horse per position accord ing to tile following conditions

K and L must be assigned to positions that are separated from each other by exactly one position

K and N cannot be assigned to positions that are next to each other

N must be assigned to a higher-numbered position than M

P must be assigned to posi ti on 3

1 Which one of the following lists an acceptable assignment of horses to positions 1 though 6 respectively

(A) K L P M N 0 (B) M K P L N 0 (C) M N K P L 0 (D) N 0 P K M L (E) 0 M P L N K

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the positions any one of which ca n be the position to which K is ass igned

(A) L 2 (B) 23

) Ll(C) w

(D) 245 (E) 2 4 6

3 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) K is assigned to position 2 (B) L is ass igned to position 2 (C) M is assigned to position 1 (D) M is assigned to position 5 (E) 0 is assigned to position 2

4 Which one of the following must be true

(A) Either K or else L is assigned to position 2 (B) Either K or else L is assigned to position 4 CC) Either M or else N is assigned to position 2 (D) Either M or else N is assigned to position 5 (E) Either M or else 0 is assigned to position 6

5 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) Land N are assigned to positions that are next to

each other (B) M and K are assigned to positions that are next to

each other (C) M and 0 are assigned to positions that are nex t to

each other CD) L and N are assigned to positions that are

separated from each other by exactly one posi tion

(E) M and P are assigned to posi tions that are separated from each other by exactly one posilion

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 25

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Six cars are to be in a straight line and will be numbered 1 through 6 in order from the front of the line to the back of the line Each car is exactly one color two are green two are orange and two are purple The arrangement of cars is restricted as follows

No car can be the same color as any car next to it in line Either car 5 or car 6 must be purple Car I cannot be orange Car 4 cannot be green

6 The cars in which one of the CANNOT be the same color as each other

(A) cars 1 and 4 (B) cars I and 5 (C) cars 3 and 5 (D) cars 3 and 6

cars 4 and 6

7 If car 2 is the same color as car 4 then which one of the followinl statements must be true)

(A) Car 1 Car 2 is orange

(C) Car 3 is green (D) Car 5 is (E) Car 6 is green

8 If car 4 is which one of the following must be true

(A) Car I is orange (B) Car 2 is green

Car 3 is orange (D) Car 5 is green (E) Car 6 is purple

9 Which one of the following statements must be false

Car 2 is green Car 4 is orange

(C) Car 5 is (D) Car 6 is orange

Car 6 is green

10 If one of the two orange cars is a third green car and if the arrangement of cars in line must conform to the same restrictions as before then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the cars each of which must be

car I car

(C) car 5 car 1 car 3 car I car 3 car 5

26 I copy The Pnnceton qevlew Inc

-

Seven consecutive time slots for a broadcast numbered in order 1 7 will be filled by six song

lpes~- H L 0 P S--and one news tape Each tape is to be to a different time sIaL and no tape is longer than any other tape The broadcast 1S subiect to the following restrictions

L must be before O The news tape must be at some time after L There must be exactly two time slots between G and P

of whether G comes before P or whether G comes after P

II If G is second which one of the following tapes third

(A) the news H L

(D) 0 (E) S

12 The news tape can be in anyone of the time slots EXCEPT the

(Al ~co~

iliird (C) fuurth (D) fiM (E) sixth

13 If Hand S are to be scheduled as far from each other as then the first the second and the third time slots could be filled ~0~d~~

(A) G H and L (B) S G and the news (C) H G and L (D) H L and 0 (E) L 0 and S

UNIT 1

14 If P is played fifth L must be played

first (B) second (el third

fourth eE) sixth

15 What is the maximum number of tapes that can separate S from the news)

CA) 1 (B) 2

3 (D) 4

5

16 Which one of the is the latest time slot in which L can be played

(Al the third (El the fourth (C) the fifth (D) the sixth (El the seventh

17 The time slot in which 0 must be is determined if G is to which one of the

time slots

CA) the first the third the fourth

(0) the fifth the sixth

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 27

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

A instructor will schedule one lesson for each of six students-Grace Janet Steve Tom and Una-one lesson per for six consecutive days The schedule must conform to the following conditions

lesson is later in the schedule than Janets lesson Unas lesson is later in the schedule than Steves lesson Steves lesson is three after Graces lesson Janets lesson is on the first day or else the third

IS If Janets lesson is scheduled for the first then the lesson for which one of the following students must be scheduled for the sixth day

(A) Grace (8)

Steve Tom

(E) Una

19 For which one of the following students is there an acceptable schedule in which the students lesson is on the third and another schedule in which the students lesson is on the fifth day

(A) Grace (8) (e) Steve (D) Tom

Una

20 Which one of the is a complete and accurate list of the students anyone of whom could be the student whose lesson is scheduled for the second day

(A) Grace (8) Tom

Grace Tom Tom

(E) Grace Henry Tom

21 If lesson is scheduled for a either immediately before or immediately after Toms lesson then Graces lesson must be scheduled for the

(A) first day (B) second day

third day fourlh fifth day

22 If Janets lesson scheduled for the third which one of the following could be true

(A) Graces lesson is scheduled for a later than lesson

Graces lesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

Henrys Jesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

(D) Toms lesson is scheduled for a later day than lesson

(E) Toms lesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

23 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of anyone of which could be the day for which Torns lesson is scheduled

first second third second third fourth second fifth sixth fi rst second third fourth

(E) second third fourth sixth

28 I Prirceton ReView loe

25

UNIT 1 -

Questions 24-28

Exactly seven products-P Q R S T W and X-are each to be advertised exactly once ill a section of a catalog The order in vhich they will be displayed is governed by the following conditions

Q must be displayed in some position before W R must be displayed immediately before X T cannot be displayed immediately before or immediately

after W S must be displayed either first or seventh Either Q or T must be displayed fourth

24 Which one of the following CANNOT be the product that is displayed first

(A) P (B) Q (C) R CD) T (E) X

If X is displayed immediately before Q then which one of the following could be true~

(A ) T is displayed first (B) R is displayed fifth (C) Q is displayed last CD) Q is displayed second (E) P is displayed second

26 If P is displayed second then which one of the following could be displayed third)

(A) R (B) S (C) T CD) W (E) X

27 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Q is displayed fifth (B) Q is displayed seventh (C) R is displayed third (D) W is displayed third (E) X is displayed fifth

28 If R is displayed sixth then which one of the following mu st be displayed fifth~

(A) P (B) Q (C) T (D) W (E) X

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 29

More 10 Order Games Qyestions 1-7

During a period of six consecLl tive days-day 1 through day 6-each of exactly six factories-F G H J Q and R-will be inspected During this period each of the factories wi ll be inspected exactly once one factory per day The sched ule for the inspections must conform to the following conditions

F is inspected on either day 1 or day 6 J is inspected on an earlier day than Q is inspected Q is inspected on the day immediately before R is

inspected If G is inspected on day 3 Q is in spected on day 5

I Which one of the fo llow ing could be a list of the factories in the order of their scheduled inspections from day 1 through day 6

(A) F Q R H J G (B) G H J Q R F (C) G J Q H R F (D) G J Q R F H (E) J H G Q R F

2 Which one of the following must be fal se

(A) The inspection of G is scheduled for day 4 (B) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspection of J is scheduled for day 4 (D) The in spection of Q is scheduled for day 3 (E) The in spection of R is scheduled for day 2

3 The in spection of which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for day 5)

(A) G (B) H (C) J (D) Q (E) R

UNIT2

4 The inspections scheduled for day 3 and day 5 respectively could be those of

(A) G and H (B) G and R (C) Hand G (D) Rand J (E) Rand H

5 If the inspection of R is sched uled for the day immediately before the inspection of F which one of the following must be true about the schedule

(A) The inspection of ei ther G or H is scheduled for day 1

(B ) The in spection of either G or J is sc heduled for day J

(C) The inspection of e ither G or J is sched uled for day 2

(D) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 3

(E) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 4

6 If the inspections of G and of H are scheduled not necessarily in that order for days as far apart as possible wh ich one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the factories anyone of which could be scheduled for inspection for day I

(A) F J (B) G H (C) G H J (D) F G H (E) F G H J

7 If the inspection of G is scheduled for the day immediately before the inspecti on of Q which one of the following could be true

(A) The inspection of G is sched uled for day 5 (B ) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspecti on of J is scheduled for day 2 (D) The inspection of Q is schedu led for day 4 (E) The inspection of R is sched uled for day 3

copy The Princeton Review Inc 65

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 8-13

During a period of seven consecutive days-from day 1 through day 7-seven investors-Fennelly Gupta Hall Jones Knight L6pez and Moss-will each view a building site exactly once Each day exactly one investor will view the site The investors must view the site in accordance with the following cond itions

Fennelly views the site on day 3 or else day 5 Lopez views the site on neither day 4 nor day 6 If Jones views the site on day 1 Hall views the site on

day 2 If Knight views the site on day 4 L6pez views the site on

day 5 Gupta views the site on the day after the day on which

Hall vIews the site

8 Which one of the following could be the order in which the investors view the site from day 1 through day 7

(A) Hall Gupta Fennelly Moss Knight L6pez Jones (B) Hall Gupta Lopez Fennelly Moss Knight Jones (C) L6pez Gupta Hall Moss Fennelly Jones Knight (D) L6pez Jones Fennelly Knight Hall Gupta Moss (E) Lopez Jones Knight Moss Fennelly Hall Gupta

9 If Jones views the site on day 1 which one of the following investors must view the site on day 4

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Knight (D) L6pez (E) Moss

10 If Knight views the site on day 4 and Moss views the site on some day after the day on which Jones views the site which one of the following must be true

(A) Jones views the site on day I (B) Jones views the site on day 2 (C) Jones views the site on day 6 (D) Moss views the site on day 2 (E) Moss views the site on day 6

11 If Hall views the site on day 2 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of investors anyone of whom could be [he investor who views the site on day 4)

(A) Knight (B) Moss (C) Jones Moss (D) Knight Moss (E) Jones Knight Moss

12 If Hall views the site on the day after the day Knight views the site and if Fennelly views the site on the day after the day Lopez views the site then Jones must view the site on day

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5

13 If the day on which Gupta views the site and the day on which L6pez views the site both come at some time before the day on which Fennelly views the site which one of the following is an investor who could view the site on day 3

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Jones (D) Knight (E) Moss

66 I copy The Princewn Review Inc

UNIT 2

Qyestions 14-18

During a single week from Monday through Friday tours will be conducted of a companys three divisions-Operations Production Sales Exactly five tours will be conducted that week one each day The schedule of tours for the week must conform to the following restrictions

Each division is toured at least once The Operations division is not toured on Monday The Production division is not toured on Wednesday The Sales division is toured on two consecutive days and

on no other days If the Operations division is toured on Thursday then the Production division is toured on Friday

14 Which one of the following CANNOT be true of the week s tour schedule

(A) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Tuesday

(B) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Friday

(C) The division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Thursday

CD) The division that is toured on Wednesday is also toured on Friday

(E) The division that is toured on Thursday is also toured on Friday

15 If in addition to the Sales division one other division is toured on two consecutive days then it could be true of the week s tour schedule both that the

(A) Production division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Thursday

(B) Production division is toured on Tuesday and that the Sales division is toured on Wednesday

(C) Operations division is toured on Tuesday and that the Production division is toured on Friday

(D) Sales division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Friday

(E) Sales division is toured on Wednesday and that the ProductlOn division is toured on Friday

16 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured

on Tuesday is also loured on Friday then for which one of the following days must a tour of the Production division be scheduled

CA) Monday (B ) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

17 If in the week s tour schedule the division that is toured on Monday is not the division that is toured on Tuesday then which one of the following could be true of the week s schedule

(A) A tour of the Sales division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(B) A tour of the Operations division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(C) The Sales division is toured on Monday CD) The Production division is toured on Tuesday (E) The Operations division is toured on Wednesday

18 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Wednesday then which one of the following must be true of the weeks tour schedule

(A) The Production division is toured on Monday (B) The Operations division is toured on Tuesday (C) The Sales division is toured on Wednesday (D) The Sales division is toured on Thursday (E) The Production division is toured on Friday

copy The Prmceton Review Inc I 67

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Each of seven television programs-H J L P Q S V-is a different rank from first seventh (from

most popular to least popular) The ranking is consistent with the conditions

J and L are each less popular than H ] is more popular than Q S and V are each less popular than L P and S are each less popular than Q S is not seventh

19 Which one of the could be the order of the to least popular

(A)] L Q V S P (B) H L Q J S P V (Cl H J Q L S V P (D) H 1 V L Q S P (E) H L V 1 P S

20 If J is more popular than L and S is more popular than P then which one of the following must be true of the

(A) J second (B) 1 is third

L is third Q is third P is seventh

21 Which one of the following programs CANNOT be ranked third

(Al L (B) J (C) Q

V P

22 If V is more than Q and J is less than L then which one of the following could be true of the

(A) P is more popular than S S is more popular than V

(C) P is more popular than L ] is more popular than V

(E) Q more popular than V

23 If Q is more than L then each of the must be true of the ranking EXCEPT

(A) H first (B) L is fOUlth

V is not fourth (D) ] is not third

Q is third

68 copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT2

Qlestions 24-28

Five people-Harry Iri s Kate Nancy and Victor-are to be scheduled as contestants on a television show one contestant per day for five consecutive days from Mond ay through Friday The following restrictions governing the scheduling of contestants must be observed

Nancy is not scheduled for Monday If Harry is scheduled for Monday Nancy is scheduled for

Friday If Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday Iris is scheduled for

Monday Kate is scheduled fo r the next day after the day for which

Victor is scheduled

24 Victor can be scheduled for any day EXCEPT

(A) Monday (B) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

25 If Iris is scheduled for the next day after Harry which one of the following lists all [hose days anyone of which could be the day for which Harry is scheduled

(A) Monday Tuesday (B) Monday Wednesday (C) Monday Thursday (D) Monday Tuesday Wednesday (E) M onday Wednesday Thursday

26 If Kate IS scheduled for Wednesday which one of the following could be true

(A) Iri s is scheduled for Friday (B) Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday (C) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Harry is scheduled (D) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Iris is scheduled (E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Kate is scheduled

27 If Kate is scheduled for Friday which one of the fo llowing mu st be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for Tuesday (B) Harry IS scheduled for Wednesday (C) Iri s is scheduled for Monday (D) Iris is scheduled for Wednesday (E) Nancy is scheduled for Wednesday

28 If Iris is scheduled for Wed nesday which one of the following must be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Nancy is scheduled

(B ) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Kate is scheduled

(C) Kate is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Harry is scheduled

CD) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for whi ch Kate is scheduled

(E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Iris is scheduled

copy The Prin ce ton Re VIew In c I 69

l SAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

20 Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-5

There are exactly ten stores and no other buildings on Oak Street On the north side of the street from west to east are stores 1 3 5 7 and 9 on the south side of the street also from west to east are stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 The stores on the north side are located directly across the street from those on the south side facing each other in pairs as follows 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 Each store is decorated with lights in exactly one of the following colors green red and yellow The stores have been decorated with lights according to the following conditions

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of any store adjacent to it

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of the store directly across the street from it

Yellow lights decorate exactly one store on each side of the street

Red lights decorate store 4 Yellow lights decorate store 5

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the colors of the lights that decorate stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 respectively

(A) green red green red green (B) green red green yellow red (C) green red yellow red green (D) yellow green red green red (E) yellow red green red yellow

2 If green lights decorate store 7 then each of the following statements could be false EXCEPT

(A) Green lights decorate store 2 (8) Green lights decorate store 10 (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Red lights decorate store 9 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 2

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Green lights decorate store 10 (B) Red lights decorate store I (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 8 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 10

4 If green lights decorate five stores on the street then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store 9 (8) Red lights decorate store 2 (C) Red lights decorate store 7 (D) Red lights decorate store lO (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

5 Suppose that yeJlow lights decorate exactly two stores not just one on the south side of the street and decorate exactly one store on the north side If all of the other conditions remain the same then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store l (8) Red lights decorate store 7 (C) Red lights decorate store 10 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 2 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

84 I copy The Princeton Review Jnc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Ouestions 6-10

A school has exactly four dormitories that are to be fully occupied-Richards Tuscarora Veblen and Wisteria-each consisting entirely of a North wing and a South wing The following rules govern assignment of students to dormitory wings

Each wing is assigned only male students or only female students

Exactly three wings have males assigned to them Richards North and Tuscarora Nonh are assigned

females If a dormitory has males assigned to one of its wings

then its other wing is assigned females If males are assigned to Veblen South then Wisteria

North is assigned males

6 If females are assigned to Veblen South and Veblen North then which one of the following could be two other wings that are also assigned females

(A) Richards North and Tuscarora South (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Richards South and Tuscarora North (D) Tuscarora North and Wisteria South (E) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South

7 It CANNOT be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria South (8) Richards South and Tuscarora South (C) Richards South and Veblen North (D) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen North and Wisteria South

8 If Wisteria North is assigned females then females must also be assigned to which one of the following

(A) Richards South (8) Wisteria South (C) Tuscarora South (D) Veblen South (E) Veblen North

9 If males are assigned to Veblen South which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the wings that CANNOT be assigned males

(A) Richards North Tuscarora North (8) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North (C) Richards North Tuscarora North Wisteria South (D) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North

Wisteria South (E) Richards North Richards South Tuscarora North

Veblen North Wisteria South

10 If Tuscarora South is assigned females then it could be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria North (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Veblen North and Wisteria North (D) Veblen South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen South and Veblen North

86 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 2: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

There are six groups in this years Civic Parade firefighters gymnasts jugglers musicians puppeteers and veterans Each group marches as a unit the groups are ordered from first at the front of the parade to sixth at the back The following conditions apply

At least two groups march behind the puppeteers but ahead of the musicians

Exactly one group marches behind the firefighters but ahead of the veterans

The gymnasts are the first third or fifth group

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the groups in the Civic Parade in order from first to last

(A) firefighters puppeteers veterans musicians gymnasts jugglers

gymnasts puppeteers jugglers musicians firefighters veterans

veterans puppeteers gymnasts jugglers musicians

puppeteers gymnasts firefighters musicians veterans

(E) musicians veterans jugglers firefighters gymnasts puppeteers

9 If the gymnasts march ahead of the veterans then which one of the following could be the fourth group

(A) gymnasts (B) jugglers

musicians puppeteers

(E) veterans

10 If the veterans march immediately behind the puppeteers then which one of the following could be the second

(A) firefighters (B) gymnasts (C) (D) musicians

veterans

11 If the jugglers are the fifth group then which one of the following must be true

(A) The puppeteers are the first group (B) The are the first group (C) The veterans are the second group (D) The gymnasts are the third group (E) The musicians are the sixth group

12 Which one of the follOWing groups CANNOT march immediately behind the gymnasts

(A) firefighters (B) jugglers (C) musicians (D) puppeteers

veterans

12 I ~ The Princeon Aeyiew lnc

UNIT 1 -

10 Order Games Questions 1-5

Six racehorses-K L M N 0 and P-will be assigned to six positions arranged in a straight line and numbered consecutively I through 6 The horses are assigned to the positions Olle horse per position accord ing to tile following conditions

K and L must be assigned to positions that are separated from each other by exactly one position

K and N cannot be assigned to positions that are next to each other

N must be assigned to a higher-numbered position than M

P must be assigned to posi ti on 3

1 Which one of the following lists an acceptable assignment of horses to positions 1 though 6 respectively

(A) K L P M N 0 (B) M K P L N 0 (C) M N K P L 0 (D) N 0 P K M L (E) 0 M P L N K

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the positions any one of which ca n be the position to which K is ass igned

(A) L 2 (B) 23

) Ll(C) w

(D) 245 (E) 2 4 6

3 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) K is assigned to position 2 (B) L is ass igned to position 2 (C) M is assigned to position 1 (D) M is assigned to position 5 (E) 0 is assigned to position 2

4 Which one of the following must be true

(A) Either K or else L is assigned to position 2 (B) Either K or else L is assigned to position 4 CC) Either M or else N is assigned to position 2 (D) Either M or else N is assigned to position 5 (E) Either M or else 0 is assigned to position 6

5 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) Land N are assigned to positions that are next to

each other (B) M and K are assigned to positions that are next to

each other (C) M and 0 are assigned to positions that are nex t to

each other CD) L and N are assigned to positions that are

separated from each other by exactly one posi tion

(E) M and P are assigned to posi tions that are separated from each other by exactly one posilion

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 25

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Six cars are to be in a straight line and will be numbered 1 through 6 in order from the front of the line to the back of the line Each car is exactly one color two are green two are orange and two are purple The arrangement of cars is restricted as follows

No car can be the same color as any car next to it in line Either car 5 or car 6 must be purple Car I cannot be orange Car 4 cannot be green

6 The cars in which one of the CANNOT be the same color as each other

(A) cars 1 and 4 (B) cars I and 5 (C) cars 3 and 5 (D) cars 3 and 6

cars 4 and 6

7 If car 2 is the same color as car 4 then which one of the followinl statements must be true)

(A) Car 1 Car 2 is orange

(C) Car 3 is green (D) Car 5 is (E) Car 6 is green

8 If car 4 is which one of the following must be true

(A) Car I is orange (B) Car 2 is green

Car 3 is orange (D) Car 5 is green (E) Car 6 is purple

9 Which one of the following statements must be false

Car 2 is green Car 4 is orange

(C) Car 5 is (D) Car 6 is orange

Car 6 is green

10 If one of the two orange cars is a third green car and if the arrangement of cars in line must conform to the same restrictions as before then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the cars each of which must be

car I car

(C) car 5 car 1 car 3 car I car 3 car 5

26 I copy The Pnnceton qevlew Inc

-

Seven consecutive time slots for a broadcast numbered in order 1 7 will be filled by six song

lpes~- H L 0 P S--and one news tape Each tape is to be to a different time sIaL and no tape is longer than any other tape The broadcast 1S subiect to the following restrictions

L must be before O The news tape must be at some time after L There must be exactly two time slots between G and P

of whether G comes before P or whether G comes after P

II If G is second which one of the following tapes third

(A) the news H L

(D) 0 (E) S

12 The news tape can be in anyone of the time slots EXCEPT the

(Al ~co~

iliird (C) fuurth (D) fiM (E) sixth

13 If Hand S are to be scheduled as far from each other as then the first the second and the third time slots could be filled ~0~d~~

(A) G H and L (B) S G and the news (C) H G and L (D) H L and 0 (E) L 0 and S

UNIT 1

14 If P is played fifth L must be played

first (B) second (el third

fourth eE) sixth

15 What is the maximum number of tapes that can separate S from the news)

CA) 1 (B) 2

3 (D) 4

5

16 Which one of the is the latest time slot in which L can be played

(Al the third (El the fourth (C) the fifth (D) the sixth (El the seventh

17 The time slot in which 0 must be is determined if G is to which one of the

time slots

CA) the first the third the fourth

(0) the fifth the sixth

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 27

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

A instructor will schedule one lesson for each of six students-Grace Janet Steve Tom and Una-one lesson per for six consecutive days The schedule must conform to the following conditions

lesson is later in the schedule than Janets lesson Unas lesson is later in the schedule than Steves lesson Steves lesson is three after Graces lesson Janets lesson is on the first day or else the third

IS If Janets lesson is scheduled for the first then the lesson for which one of the following students must be scheduled for the sixth day

(A) Grace (8)

Steve Tom

(E) Una

19 For which one of the following students is there an acceptable schedule in which the students lesson is on the third and another schedule in which the students lesson is on the fifth day

(A) Grace (8) (e) Steve (D) Tom

Una

20 Which one of the is a complete and accurate list of the students anyone of whom could be the student whose lesson is scheduled for the second day

(A) Grace (8) Tom

Grace Tom Tom

(E) Grace Henry Tom

21 If lesson is scheduled for a either immediately before or immediately after Toms lesson then Graces lesson must be scheduled for the

(A) first day (B) second day

third day fourlh fifth day

22 If Janets lesson scheduled for the third which one of the following could be true

(A) Graces lesson is scheduled for a later than lesson

Graces lesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

Henrys Jesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

(D) Toms lesson is scheduled for a later day than lesson

(E) Toms lesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

23 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of anyone of which could be the day for which Torns lesson is scheduled

first second third second third fourth second fifth sixth fi rst second third fourth

(E) second third fourth sixth

28 I Prirceton ReView loe

25

UNIT 1 -

Questions 24-28

Exactly seven products-P Q R S T W and X-are each to be advertised exactly once ill a section of a catalog The order in vhich they will be displayed is governed by the following conditions

Q must be displayed in some position before W R must be displayed immediately before X T cannot be displayed immediately before or immediately

after W S must be displayed either first or seventh Either Q or T must be displayed fourth

24 Which one of the following CANNOT be the product that is displayed first

(A) P (B) Q (C) R CD) T (E) X

If X is displayed immediately before Q then which one of the following could be true~

(A ) T is displayed first (B) R is displayed fifth (C) Q is displayed last CD) Q is displayed second (E) P is displayed second

26 If P is displayed second then which one of the following could be displayed third)

(A) R (B) S (C) T CD) W (E) X

27 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Q is displayed fifth (B) Q is displayed seventh (C) R is displayed third (D) W is displayed third (E) X is displayed fifth

28 If R is displayed sixth then which one of the following mu st be displayed fifth~

(A) P (B) Q (C) T (D) W (E) X

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 29

More 10 Order Games Qyestions 1-7

During a period of six consecLl tive days-day 1 through day 6-each of exactly six factories-F G H J Q and R-will be inspected During this period each of the factories wi ll be inspected exactly once one factory per day The sched ule for the inspections must conform to the following conditions

F is inspected on either day 1 or day 6 J is inspected on an earlier day than Q is inspected Q is inspected on the day immediately before R is

inspected If G is inspected on day 3 Q is in spected on day 5

I Which one of the fo llow ing could be a list of the factories in the order of their scheduled inspections from day 1 through day 6

(A) F Q R H J G (B) G H J Q R F (C) G J Q H R F (D) G J Q R F H (E) J H G Q R F

2 Which one of the following must be fal se

(A) The inspection of G is scheduled for day 4 (B) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspection of J is scheduled for day 4 (D) The in spection of Q is scheduled for day 3 (E) The in spection of R is scheduled for day 2

3 The in spection of which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for day 5)

(A) G (B) H (C) J (D) Q (E) R

UNIT2

4 The inspections scheduled for day 3 and day 5 respectively could be those of

(A) G and H (B) G and R (C) Hand G (D) Rand J (E) Rand H

5 If the inspection of R is sched uled for the day immediately before the inspection of F which one of the following must be true about the schedule

(A) The inspection of ei ther G or H is scheduled for day 1

(B ) The in spection of either G or J is sc heduled for day J

(C) The inspection of e ither G or J is sched uled for day 2

(D) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 3

(E) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 4

6 If the inspections of G and of H are scheduled not necessarily in that order for days as far apart as possible wh ich one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the factories anyone of which could be scheduled for inspection for day I

(A) F J (B) G H (C) G H J (D) F G H (E) F G H J

7 If the inspection of G is scheduled for the day immediately before the inspecti on of Q which one of the following could be true

(A) The inspection of G is sched uled for day 5 (B ) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspecti on of J is scheduled for day 2 (D) The inspection of Q is schedu led for day 4 (E) The inspection of R is sched uled for day 3

copy The Princeton Review Inc 65

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 8-13

During a period of seven consecutive days-from day 1 through day 7-seven investors-Fennelly Gupta Hall Jones Knight L6pez and Moss-will each view a building site exactly once Each day exactly one investor will view the site The investors must view the site in accordance with the following cond itions

Fennelly views the site on day 3 or else day 5 Lopez views the site on neither day 4 nor day 6 If Jones views the site on day 1 Hall views the site on

day 2 If Knight views the site on day 4 L6pez views the site on

day 5 Gupta views the site on the day after the day on which

Hall vIews the site

8 Which one of the following could be the order in which the investors view the site from day 1 through day 7

(A) Hall Gupta Fennelly Moss Knight L6pez Jones (B) Hall Gupta Lopez Fennelly Moss Knight Jones (C) L6pez Gupta Hall Moss Fennelly Jones Knight (D) L6pez Jones Fennelly Knight Hall Gupta Moss (E) Lopez Jones Knight Moss Fennelly Hall Gupta

9 If Jones views the site on day 1 which one of the following investors must view the site on day 4

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Knight (D) L6pez (E) Moss

10 If Knight views the site on day 4 and Moss views the site on some day after the day on which Jones views the site which one of the following must be true

(A) Jones views the site on day I (B) Jones views the site on day 2 (C) Jones views the site on day 6 (D) Moss views the site on day 2 (E) Moss views the site on day 6

11 If Hall views the site on day 2 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of investors anyone of whom could be [he investor who views the site on day 4)

(A) Knight (B) Moss (C) Jones Moss (D) Knight Moss (E) Jones Knight Moss

12 If Hall views the site on the day after the day Knight views the site and if Fennelly views the site on the day after the day Lopez views the site then Jones must view the site on day

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5

13 If the day on which Gupta views the site and the day on which L6pez views the site both come at some time before the day on which Fennelly views the site which one of the following is an investor who could view the site on day 3

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Jones (D) Knight (E) Moss

66 I copy The Princewn Review Inc

UNIT 2

Qyestions 14-18

During a single week from Monday through Friday tours will be conducted of a companys three divisions-Operations Production Sales Exactly five tours will be conducted that week one each day The schedule of tours for the week must conform to the following restrictions

Each division is toured at least once The Operations division is not toured on Monday The Production division is not toured on Wednesday The Sales division is toured on two consecutive days and

on no other days If the Operations division is toured on Thursday then the Production division is toured on Friday

14 Which one of the following CANNOT be true of the week s tour schedule

(A) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Tuesday

(B) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Friday

(C) The division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Thursday

CD) The division that is toured on Wednesday is also toured on Friday

(E) The division that is toured on Thursday is also toured on Friday

15 If in addition to the Sales division one other division is toured on two consecutive days then it could be true of the week s tour schedule both that the

(A) Production division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Thursday

(B) Production division is toured on Tuesday and that the Sales division is toured on Wednesday

(C) Operations division is toured on Tuesday and that the Production division is toured on Friday

(D) Sales division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Friday

(E) Sales division is toured on Wednesday and that the ProductlOn division is toured on Friday

16 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured

on Tuesday is also loured on Friday then for which one of the following days must a tour of the Production division be scheduled

CA) Monday (B ) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

17 If in the week s tour schedule the division that is toured on Monday is not the division that is toured on Tuesday then which one of the following could be true of the week s schedule

(A) A tour of the Sales division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(B) A tour of the Operations division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(C) The Sales division is toured on Monday CD) The Production division is toured on Tuesday (E) The Operations division is toured on Wednesday

18 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Wednesday then which one of the following must be true of the weeks tour schedule

(A) The Production division is toured on Monday (B) The Operations division is toured on Tuesday (C) The Sales division is toured on Wednesday (D) The Sales division is toured on Thursday (E) The Production division is toured on Friday

copy The Prmceton Review Inc I 67

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Each of seven television programs-H J L P Q S V-is a different rank from first seventh (from

most popular to least popular) The ranking is consistent with the conditions

J and L are each less popular than H ] is more popular than Q S and V are each less popular than L P and S are each less popular than Q S is not seventh

19 Which one of the could be the order of the to least popular

(A)] L Q V S P (B) H L Q J S P V (Cl H J Q L S V P (D) H 1 V L Q S P (E) H L V 1 P S

20 If J is more popular than L and S is more popular than P then which one of the following must be true of the

(A) J second (B) 1 is third

L is third Q is third P is seventh

21 Which one of the following programs CANNOT be ranked third

(Al L (B) J (C) Q

V P

22 If V is more than Q and J is less than L then which one of the following could be true of the

(A) P is more popular than S S is more popular than V

(C) P is more popular than L ] is more popular than V

(E) Q more popular than V

23 If Q is more than L then each of the must be true of the ranking EXCEPT

(A) H first (B) L is fOUlth

V is not fourth (D) ] is not third

Q is third

68 copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT2

Qlestions 24-28

Five people-Harry Iri s Kate Nancy and Victor-are to be scheduled as contestants on a television show one contestant per day for five consecutive days from Mond ay through Friday The following restrictions governing the scheduling of contestants must be observed

Nancy is not scheduled for Monday If Harry is scheduled for Monday Nancy is scheduled for

Friday If Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday Iris is scheduled for

Monday Kate is scheduled fo r the next day after the day for which

Victor is scheduled

24 Victor can be scheduled for any day EXCEPT

(A) Monday (B) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

25 If Iris is scheduled for the next day after Harry which one of the following lists all [hose days anyone of which could be the day for which Harry is scheduled

(A) Monday Tuesday (B) Monday Wednesday (C) Monday Thursday (D) Monday Tuesday Wednesday (E) M onday Wednesday Thursday

26 If Kate IS scheduled for Wednesday which one of the following could be true

(A) Iri s is scheduled for Friday (B) Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday (C) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Harry is scheduled (D) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Iris is scheduled (E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Kate is scheduled

27 If Kate is scheduled for Friday which one of the fo llowing mu st be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for Tuesday (B) Harry IS scheduled for Wednesday (C) Iri s is scheduled for Monday (D) Iris is scheduled for Wednesday (E) Nancy is scheduled for Wednesday

28 If Iris is scheduled for Wed nesday which one of the following must be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Nancy is scheduled

(B ) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Kate is scheduled

(C) Kate is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Harry is scheduled

CD) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for whi ch Kate is scheduled

(E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Iris is scheduled

copy The Prin ce ton Re VIew In c I 69

l SAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

20 Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-5

There are exactly ten stores and no other buildings on Oak Street On the north side of the street from west to east are stores 1 3 5 7 and 9 on the south side of the street also from west to east are stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 The stores on the north side are located directly across the street from those on the south side facing each other in pairs as follows 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 Each store is decorated with lights in exactly one of the following colors green red and yellow The stores have been decorated with lights according to the following conditions

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of any store adjacent to it

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of the store directly across the street from it

Yellow lights decorate exactly one store on each side of the street

Red lights decorate store 4 Yellow lights decorate store 5

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the colors of the lights that decorate stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 respectively

(A) green red green red green (B) green red green yellow red (C) green red yellow red green (D) yellow green red green red (E) yellow red green red yellow

2 If green lights decorate store 7 then each of the following statements could be false EXCEPT

(A) Green lights decorate store 2 (8) Green lights decorate store 10 (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Red lights decorate store 9 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 2

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Green lights decorate store 10 (B) Red lights decorate store I (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 8 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 10

4 If green lights decorate five stores on the street then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store 9 (8) Red lights decorate store 2 (C) Red lights decorate store 7 (D) Red lights decorate store lO (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

5 Suppose that yeJlow lights decorate exactly two stores not just one on the south side of the street and decorate exactly one store on the north side If all of the other conditions remain the same then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store l (8) Red lights decorate store 7 (C) Red lights decorate store 10 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 2 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

84 I copy The Princeton Review Jnc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Ouestions 6-10

A school has exactly four dormitories that are to be fully occupied-Richards Tuscarora Veblen and Wisteria-each consisting entirely of a North wing and a South wing The following rules govern assignment of students to dormitory wings

Each wing is assigned only male students or only female students

Exactly three wings have males assigned to them Richards North and Tuscarora Nonh are assigned

females If a dormitory has males assigned to one of its wings

then its other wing is assigned females If males are assigned to Veblen South then Wisteria

North is assigned males

6 If females are assigned to Veblen South and Veblen North then which one of the following could be two other wings that are also assigned females

(A) Richards North and Tuscarora South (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Richards South and Tuscarora North (D) Tuscarora North and Wisteria South (E) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South

7 It CANNOT be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria South (8) Richards South and Tuscarora South (C) Richards South and Veblen North (D) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen North and Wisteria South

8 If Wisteria North is assigned females then females must also be assigned to which one of the following

(A) Richards South (8) Wisteria South (C) Tuscarora South (D) Veblen South (E) Veblen North

9 If males are assigned to Veblen South which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the wings that CANNOT be assigned males

(A) Richards North Tuscarora North (8) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North (C) Richards North Tuscarora North Wisteria South (D) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North

Wisteria South (E) Richards North Richards South Tuscarora North

Veblen North Wisteria South

10 If Tuscarora South is assigned females then it could be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria North (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Veblen North and Wisteria North (D) Veblen South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen South and Veblen North

86 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 3: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT 1 -

10 Order Games Questions 1-5

Six racehorses-K L M N 0 and P-will be assigned to six positions arranged in a straight line and numbered consecutively I through 6 The horses are assigned to the positions Olle horse per position accord ing to tile following conditions

K and L must be assigned to positions that are separated from each other by exactly one position

K and N cannot be assigned to positions that are next to each other

N must be assigned to a higher-numbered position than M

P must be assigned to posi ti on 3

1 Which one of the following lists an acceptable assignment of horses to positions 1 though 6 respectively

(A) K L P M N 0 (B) M K P L N 0 (C) M N K P L 0 (D) N 0 P K M L (E) 0 M P L N K

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the positions any one of which ca n be the position to which K is ass igned

(A) L 2 (B) 23

) Ll(C) w

(D) 245 (E) 2 4 6

3 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) K is assigned to position 2 (B) L is ass igned to position 2 (C) M is assigned to position 1 (D) M is assigned to position 5 (E) 0 is assigned to position 2

4 Which one of the following must be true

(A) Either K or else L is assigned to position 2 (B) Either K or else L is assigned to position 4 CC) Either M or else N is assigned to position 2 (D) Either M or else N is assigned to position 5 (E) Either M or else 0 is assigned to position 6

5 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) Land N are assigned to positions that are next to

each other (B) M and K are assigned to positions that are next to

each other (C) M and 0 are assigned to positions that are nex t to

each other CD) L and N are assigned to positions that are

separated from each other by exactly one posi tion

(E) M and P are assigned to posi tions that are separated from each other by exactly one posilion

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 25

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Six cars are to be in a straight line and will be numbered 1 through 6 in order from the front of the line to the back of the line Each car is exactly one color two are green two are orange and two are purple The arrangement of cars is restricted as follows

No car can be the same color as any car next to it in line Either car 5 or car 6 must be purple Car I cannot be orange Car 4 cannot be green

6 The cars in which one of the CANNOT be the same color as each other

(A) cars 1 and 4 (B) cars I and 5 (C) cars 3 and 5 (D) cars 3 and 6

cars 4 and 6

7 If car 2 is the same color as car 4 then which one of the followinl statements must be true)

(A) Car 1 Car 2 is orange

(C) Car 3 is green (D) Car 5 is (E) Car 6 is green

8 If car 4 is which one of the following must be true

(A) Car I is orange (B) Car 2 is green

Car 3 is orange (D) Car 5 is green (E) Car 6 is purple

9 Which one of the following statements must be false

Car 2 is green Car 4 is orange

(C) Car 5 is (D) Car 6 is orange

Car 6 is green

10 If one of the two orange cars is a third green car and if the arrangement of cars in line must conform to the same restrictions as before then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the cars each of which must be

car I car

(C) car 5 car 1 car 3 car I car 3 car 5

26 I copy The Pnnceton qevlew Inc

-

Seven consecutive time slots for a broadcast numbered in order 1 7 will be filled by six song

lpes~- H L 0 P S--and one news tape Each tape is to be to a different time sIaL and no tape is longer than any other tape The broadcast 1S subiect to the following restrictions

L must be before O The news tape must be at some time after L There must be exactly two time slots between G and P

of whether G comes before P or whether G comes after P

II If G is second which one of the following tapes third

(A) the news H L

(D) 0 (E) S

12 The news tape can be in anyone of the time slots EXCEPT the

(Al ~co~

iliird (C) fuurth (D) fiM (E) sixth

13 If Hand S are to be scheduled as far from each other as then the first the second and the third time slots could be filled ~0~d~~

(A) G H and L (B) S G and the news (C) H G and L (D) H L and 0 (E) L 0 and S

UNIT 1

14 If P is played fifth L must be played

first (B) second (el third

fourth eE) sixth

15 What is the maximum number of tapes that can separate S from the news)

CA) 1 (B) 2

3 (D) 4

5

16 Which one of the is the latest time slot in which L can be played

(Al the third (El the fourth (C) the fifth (D) the sixth (El the seventh

17 The time slot in which 0 must be is determined if G is to which one of the

time slots

CA) the first the third the fourth

(0) the fifth the sixth

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 27

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

A instructor will schedule one lesson for each of six students-Grace Janet Steve Tom and Una-one lesson per for six consecutive days The schedule must conform to the following conditions

lesson is later in the schedule than Janets lesson Unas lesson is later in the schedule than Steves lesson Steves lesson is three after Graces lesson Janets lesson is on the first day or else the third

IS If Janets lesson is scheduled for the first then the lesson for which one of the following students must be scheduled for the sixth day

(A) Grace (8)

Steve Tom

(E) Una

19 For which one of the following students is there an acceptable schedule in which the students lesson is on the third and another schedule in which the students lesson is on the fifth day

(A) Grace (8) (e) Steve (D) Tom

Una

20 Which one of the is a complete and accurate list of the students anyone of whom could be the student whose lesson is scheduled for the second day

(A) Grace (8) Tom

Grace Tom Tom

(E) Grace Henry Tom

21 If lesson is scheduled for a either immediately before or immediately after Toms lesson then Graces lesson must be scheduled for the

(A) first day (B) second day

third day fourlh fifth day

22 If Janets lesson scheduled for the third which one of the following could be true

(A) Graces lesson is scheduled for a later than lesson

Graces lesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

Henrys Jesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

(D) Toms lesson is scheduled for a later day than lesson

(E) Toms lesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

23 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of anyone of which could be the day for which Torns lesson is scheduled

first second third second third fourth second fifth sixth fi rst second third fourth

(E) second third fourth sixth

28 I Prirceton ReView loe

25

UNIT 1 -

Questions 24-28

Exactly seven products-P Q R S T W and X-are each to be advertised exactly once ill a section of a catalog The order in vhich they will be displayed is governed by the following conditions

Q must be displayed in some position before W R must be displayed immediately before X T cannot be displayed immediately before or immediately

after W S must be displayed either first or seventh Either Q or T must be displayed fourth

24 Which one of the following CANNOT be the product that is displayed first

(A) P (B) Q (C) R CD) T (E) X

If X is displayed immediately before Q then which one of the following could be true~

(A ) T is displayed first (B) R is displayed fifth (C) Q is displayed last CD) Q is displayed second (E) P is displayed second

26 If P is displayed second then which one of the following could be displayed third)

(A) R (B) S (C) T CD) W (E) X

27 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Q is displayed fifth (B) Q is displayed seventh (C) R is displayed third (D) W is displayed third (E) X is displayed fifth

28 If R is displayed sixth then which one of the following mu st be displayed fifth~

(A) P (B) Q (C) T (D) W (E) X

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 29

More 10 Order Games Qyestions 1-7

During a period of six consecLl tive days-day 1 through day 6-each of exactly six factories-F G H J Q and R-will be inspected During this period each of the factories wi ll be inspected exactly once one factory per day The sched ule for the inspections must conform to the following conditions

F is inspected on either day 1 or day 6 J is inspected on an earlier day than Q is inspected Q is inspected on the day immediately before R is

inspected If G is inspected on day 3 Q is in spected on day 5

I Which one of the fo llow ing could be a list of the factories in the order of their scheduled inspections from day 1 through day 6

(A) F Q R H J G (B) G H J Q R F (C) G J Q H R F (D) G J Q R F H (E) J H G Q R F

2 Which one of the following must be fal se

(A) The inspection of G is scheduled for day 4 (B) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspection of J is scheduled for day 4 (D) The in spection of Q is scheduled for day 3 (E) The in spection of R is scheduled for day 2

3 The in spection of which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for day 5)

(A) G (B) H (C) J (D) Q (E) R

UNIT2

4 The inspections scheduled for day 3 and day 5 respectively could be those of

(A) G and H (B) G and R (C) Hand G (D) Rand J (E) Rand H

5 If the inspection of R is sched uled for the day immediately before the inspection of F which one of the following must be true about the schedule

(A) The inspection of ei ther G or H is scheduled for day 1

(B ) The in spection of either G or J is sc heduled for day J

(C) The inspection of e ither G or J is sched uled for day 2

(D) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 3

(E) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 4

6 If the inspections of G and of H are scheduled not necessarily in that order for days as far apart as possible wh ich one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the factories anyone of which could be scheduled for inspection for day I

(A) F J (B) G H (C) G H J (D) F G H (E) F G H J

7 If the inspection of G is scheduled for the day immediately before the inspecti on of Q which one of the following could be true

(A) The inspection of G is sched uled for day 5 (B ) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspecti on of J is scheduled for day 2 (D) The inspection of Q is schedu led for day 4 (E) The inspection of R is sched uled for day 3

copy The Princeton Review Inc 65

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 8-13

During a period of seven consecutive days-from day 1 through day 7-seven investors-Fennelly Gupta Hall Jones Knight L6pez and Moss-will each view a building site exactly once Each day exactly one investor will view the site The investors must view the site in accordance with the following cond itions

Fennelly views the site on day 3 or else day 5 Lopez views the site on neither day 4 nor day 6 If Jones views the site on day 1 Hall views the site on

day 2 If Knight views the site on day 4 L6pez views the site on

day 5 Gupta views the site on the day after the day on which

Hall vIews the site

8 Which one of the following could be the order in which the investors view the site from day 1 through day 7

(A) Hall Gupta Fennelly Moss Knight L6pez Jones (B) Hall Gupta Lopez Fennelly Moss Knight Jones (C) L6pez Gupta Hall Moss Fennelly Jones Knight (D) L6pez Jones Fennelly Knight Hall Gupta Moss (E) Lopez Jones Knight Moss Fennelly Hall Gupta

9 If Jones views the site on day 1 which one of the following investors must view the site on day 4

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Knight (D) L6pez (E) Moss

10 If Knight views the site on day 4 and Moss views the site on some day after the day on which Jones views the site which one of the following must be true

(A) Jones views the site on day I (B) Jones views the site on day 2 (C) Jones views the site on day 6 (D) Moss views the site on day 2 (E) Moss views the site on day 6

11 If Hall views the site on day 2 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of investors anyone of whom could be [he investor who views the site on day 4)

(A) Knight (B) Moss (C) Jones Moss (D) Knight Moss (E) Jones Knight Moss

12 If Hall views the site on the day after the day Knight views the site and if Fennelly views the site on the day after the day Lopez views the site then Jones must view the site on day

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5

13 If the day on which Gupta views the site and the day on which L6pez views the site both come at some time before the day on which Fennelly views the site which one of the following is an investor who could view the site on day 3

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Jones (D) Knight (E) Moss

66 I copy The Princewn Review Inc

UNIT 2

Qyestions 14-18

During a single week from Monday through Friday tours will be conducted of a companys three divisions-Operations Production Sales Exactly five tours will be conducted that week one each day The schedule of tours for the week must conform to the following restrictions

Each division is toured at least once The Operations division is not toured on Monday The Production division is not toured on Wednesday The Sales division is toured on two consecutive days and

on no other days If the Operations division is toured on Thursday then the Production division is toured on Friday

14 Which one of the following CANNOT be true of the week s tour schedule

(A) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Tuesday

(B) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Friday

(C) The division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Thursday

CD) The division that is toured on Wednesday is also toured on Friday

(E) The division that is toured on Thursday is also toured on Friday

15 If in addition to the Sales division one other division is toured on two consecutive days then it could be true of the week s tour schedule both that the

(A) Production division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Thursday

(B) Production division is toured on Tuesday and that the Sales division is toured on Wednesday

(C) Operations division is toured on Tuesday and that the Production division is toured on Friday

(D) Sales division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Friday

(E) Sales division is toured on Wednesday and that the ProductlOn division is toured on Friday

16 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured

on Tuesday is also loured on Friday then for which one of the following days must a tour of the Production division be scheduled

CA) Monday (B ) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

17 If in the week s tour schedule the division that is toured on Monday is not the division that is toured on Tuesday then which one of the following could be true of the week s schedule

(A) A tour of the Sales division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(B) A tour of the Operations division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(C) The Sales division is toured on Monday CD) The Production division is toured on Tuesday (E) The Operations division is toured on Wednesday

18 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Wednesday then which one of the following must be true of the weeks tour schedule

(A) The Production division is toured on Monday (B) The Operations division is toured on Tuesday (C) The Sales division is toured on Wednesday (D) The Sales division is toured on Thursday (E) The Production division is toured on Friday

copy The Prmceton Review Inc I 67

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Each of seven television programs-H J L P Q S V-is a different rank from first seventh (from

most popular to least popular) The ranking is consistent with the conditions

J and L are each less popular than H ] is more popular than Q S and V are each less popular than L P and S are each less popular than Q S is not seventh

19 Which one of the could be the order of the to least popular

(A)] L Q V S P (B) H L Q J S P V (Cl H J Q L S V P (D) H 1 V L Q S P (E) H L V 1 P S

20 If J is more popular than L and S is more popular than P then which one of the following must be true of the

(A) J second (B) 1 is third

L is third Q is third P is seventh

21 Which one of the following programs CANNOT be ranked third

(Al L (B) J (C) Q

V P

22 If V is more than Q and J is less than L then which one of the following could be true of the

(A) P is more popular than S S is more popular than V

(C) P is more popular than L ] is more popular than V

(E) Q more popular than V

23 If Q is more than L then each of the must be true of the ranking EXCEPT

(A) H first (B) L is fOUlth

V is not fourth (D) ] is not third

Q is third

68 copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT2

Qlestions 24-28

Five people-Harry Iri s Kate Nancy and Victor-are to be scheduled as contestants on a television show one contestant per day for five consecutive days from Mond ay through Friday The following restrictions governing the scheduling of contestants must be observed

Nancy is not scheduled for Monday If Harry is scheduled for Monday Nancy is scheduled for

Friday If Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday Iris is scheduled for

Monday Kate is scheduled fo r the next day after the day for which

Victor is scheduled

24 Victor can be scheduled for any day EXCEPT

(A) Monday (B) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

25 If Iris is scheduled for the next day after Harry which one of the following lists all [hose days anyone of which could be the day for which Harry is scheduled

(A) Monday Tuesday (B) Monday Wednesday (C) Monday Thursday (D) Monday Tuesday Wednesday (E) M onday Wednesday Thursday

26 If Kate IS scheduled for Wednesday which one of the following could be true

(A) Iri s is scheduled for Friday (B) Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday (C) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Harry is scheduled (D) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Iris is scheduled (E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Kate is scheduled

27 If Kate is scheduled for Friday which one of the fo llowing mu st be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for Tuesday (B) Harry IS scheduled for Wednesday (C) Iri s is scheduled for Monday (D) Iris is scheduled for Wednesday (E) Nancy is scheduled for Wednesday

28 If Iris is scheduled for Wed nesday which one of the following must be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Nancy is scheduled

(B ) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Kate is scheduled

(C) Kate is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Harry is scheduled

CD) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for whi ch Kate is scheduled

(E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Iris is scheduled

copy The Prin ce ton Re VIew In c I 69

l SAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

20 Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-5

There are exactly ten stores and no other buildings on Oak Street On the north side of the street from west to east are stores 1 3 5 7 and 9 on the south side of the street also from west to east are stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 The stores on the north side are located directly across the street from those on the south side facing each other in pairs as follows 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 Each store is decorated with lights in exactly one of the following colors green red and yellow The stores have been decorated with lights according to the following conditions

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of any store adjacent to it

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of the store directly across the street from it

Yellow lights decorate exactly one store on each side of the street

Red lights decorate store 4 Yellow lights decorate store 5

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the colors of the lights that decorate stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 respectively

(A) green red green red green (B) green red green yellow red (C) green red yellow red green (D) yellow green red green red (E) yellow red green red yellow

2 If green lights decorate store 7 then each of the following statements could be false EXCEPT

(A) Green lights decorate store 2 (8) Green lights decorate store 10 (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Red lights decorate store 9 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 2

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Green lights decorate store 10 (B) Red lights decorate store I (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 8 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 10

4 If green lights decorate five stores on the street then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store 9 (8) Red lights decorate store 2 (C) Red lights decorate store 7 (D) Red lights decorate store lO (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

5 Suppose that yeJlow lights decorate exactly two stores not just one on the south side of the street and decorate exactly one store on the north side If all of the other conditions remain the same then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store l (8) Red lights decorate store 7 (C) Red lights decorate store 10 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 2 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

84 I copy The Princeton Review Jnc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Ouestions 6-10

A school has exactly four dormitories that are to be fully occupied-Richards Tuscarora Veblen and Wisteria-each consisting entirely of a North wing and a South wing The following rules govern assignment of students to dormitory wings

Each wing is assigned only male students or only female students

Exactly three wings have males assigned to them Richards North and Tuscarora Nonh are assigned

females If a dormitory has males assigned to one of its wings

then its other wing is assigned females If males are assigned to Veblen South then Wisteria

North is assigned males

6 If females are assigned to Veblen South and Veblen North then which one of the following could be two other wings that are also assigned females

(A) Richards North and Tuscarora South (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Richards South and Tuscarora North (D) Tuscarora North and Wisteria South (E) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South

7 It CANNOT be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria South (8) Richards South and Tuscarora South (C) Richards South and Veblen North (D) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen North and Wisteria South

8 If Wisteria North is assigned females then females must also be assigned to which one of the following

(A) Richards South (8) Wisteria South (C) Tuscarora South (D) Veblen South (E) Veblen North

9 If males are assigned to Veblen South which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the wings that CANNOT be assigned males

(A) Richards North Tuscarora North (8) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North (C) Richards North Tuscarora North Wisteria South (D) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North

Wisteria South (E) Richards North Richards South Tuscarora North

Veblen North Wisteria South

10 If Tuscarora South is assigned females then it could be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria North (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Veblen North and Wisteria North (D) Veblen South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen South and Veblen North

86 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 4: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Six cars are to be in a straight line and will be numbered 1 through 6 in order from the front of the line to the back of the line Each car is exactly one color two are green two are orange and two are purple The arrangement of cars is restricted as follows

No car can be the same color as any car next to it in line Either car 5 or car 6 must be purple Car I cannot be orange Car 4 cannot be green

6 The cars in which one of the CANNOT be the same color as each other

(A) cars 1 and 4 (B) cars I and 5 (C) cars 3 and 5 (D) cars 3 and 6

cars 4 and 6

7 If car 2 is the same color as car 4 then which one of the followinl statements must be true)

(A) Car 1 Car 2 is orange

(C) Car 3 is green (D) Car 5 is (E) Car 6 is green

8 If car 4 is which one of the following must be true

(A) Car I is orange (B) Car 2 is green

Car 3 is orange (D) Car 5 is green (E) Car 6 is purple

9 Which one of the following statements must be false

Car 2 is green Car 4 is orange

(C) Car 5 is (D) Car 6 is orange

Car 6 is green

10 If one of the two orange cars is a third green car and if the arrangement of cars in line must conform to the same restrictions as before then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the cars each of which must be

car I car

(C) car 5 car 1 car 3 car I car 3 car 5

26 I copy The Pnnceton qevlew Inc

-

Seven consecutive time slots for a broadcast numbered in order 1 7 will be filled by six song

lpes~- H L 0 P S--and one news tape Each tape is to be to a different time sIaL and no tape is longer than any other tape The broadcast 1S subiect to the following restrictions

L must be before O The news tape must be at some time after L There must be exactly two time slots between G and P

of whether G comes before P or whether G comes after P

II If G is second which one of the following tapes third

(A) the news H L

(D) 0 (E) S

12 The news tape can be in anyone of the time slots EXCEPT the

(Al ~co~

iliird (C) fuurth (D) fiM (E) sixth

13 If Hand S are to be scheduled as far from each other as then the first the second and the third time slots could be filled ~0~d~~

(A) G H and L (B) S G and the news (C) H G and L (D) H L and 0 (E) L 0 and S

UNIT 1

14 If P is played fifth L must be played

first (B) second (el third

fourth eE) sixth

15 What is the maximum number of tapes that can separate S from the news)

CA) 1 (B) 2

3 (D) 4

5

16 Which one of the is the latest time slot in which L can be played

(Al the third (El the fourth (C) the fifth (D) the sixth (El the seventh

17 The time slot in which 0 must be is determined if G is to which one of the

time slots

CA) the first the third the fourth

(0) the fifth the sixth

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 27

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

A instructor will schedule one lesson for each of six students-Grace Janet Steve Tom and Una-one lesson per for six consecutive days The schedule must conform to the following conditions

lesson is later in the schedule than Janets lesson Unas lesson is later in the schedule than Steves lesson Steves lesson is three after Graces lesson Janets lesson is on the first day or else the third

IS If Janets lesson is scheduled for the first then the lesson for which one of the following students must be scheduled for the sixth day

(A) Grace (8)

Steve Tom

(E) Una

19 For which one of the following students is there an acceptable schedule in which the students lesson is on the third and another schedule in which the students lesson is on the fifth day

(A) Grace (8) (e) Steve (D) Tom

Una

20 Which one of the is a complete and accurate list of the students anyone of whom could be the student whose lesson is scheduled for the second day

(A) Grace (8) Tom

Grace Tom Tom

(E) Grace Henry Tom

21 If lesson is scheduled for a either immediately before or immediately after Toms lesson then Graces lesson must be scheduled for the

(A) first day (B) second day

third day fourlh fifth day

22 If Janets lesson scheduled for the third which one of the following could be true

(A) Graces lesson is scheduled for a later than lesson

Graces lesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

Henrys Jesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

(D) Toms lesson is scheduled for a later day than lesson

(E) Toms lesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

23 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of anyone of which could be the day for which Torns lesson is scheduled

first second third second third fourth second fifth sixth fi rst second third fourth

(E) second third fourth sixth

28 I Prirceton ReView loe

25

UNIT 1 -

Questions 24-28

Exactly seven products-P Q R S T W and X-are each to be advertised exactly once ill a section of a catalog The order in vhich they will be displayed is governed by the following conditions

Q must be displayed in some position before W R must be displayed immediately before X T cannot be displayed immediately before or immediately

after W S must be displayed either first or seventh Either Q or T must be displayed fourth

24 Which one of the following CANNOT be the product that is displayed first

(A) P (B) Q (C) R CD) T (E) X

If X is displayed immediately before Q then which one of the following could be true~

(A ) T is displayed first (B) R is displayed fifth (C) Q is displayed last CD) Q is displayed second (E) P is displayed second

26 If P is displayed second then which one of the following could be displayed third)

(A) R (B) S (C) T CD) W (E) X

27 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Q is displayed fifth (B) Q is displayed seventh (C) R is displayed third (D) W is displayed third (E) X is displayed fifth

28 If R is displayed sixth then which one of the following mu st be displayed fifth~

(A) P (B) Q (C) T (D) W (E) X

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 29

More 10 Order Games Qyestions 1-7

During a period of six consecLl tive days-day 1 through day 6-each of exactly six factories-F G H J Q and R-will be inspected During this period each of the factories wi ll be inspected exactly once one factory per day The sched ule for the inspections must conform to the following conditions

F is inspected on either day 1 or day 6 J is inspected on an earlier day than Q is inspected Q is inspected on the day immediately before R is

inspected If G is inspected on day 3 Q is in spected on day 5

I Which one of the fo llow ing could be a list of the factories in the order of their scheduled inspections from day 1 through day 6

(A) F Q R H J G (B) G H J Q R F (C) G J Q H R F (D) G J Q R F H (E) J H G Q R F

2 Which one of the following must be fal se

(A) The inspection of G is scheduled for day 4 (B) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspection of J is scheduled for day 4 (D) The in spection of Q is scheduled for day 3 (E) The in spection of R is scheduled for day 2

3 The in spection of which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for day 5)

(A) G (B) H (C) J (D) Q (E) R

UNIT2

4 The inspections scheduled for day 3 and day 5 respectively could be those of

(A) G and H (B) G and R (C) Hand G (D) Rand J (E) Rand H

5 If the inspection of R is sched uled for the day immediately before the inspection of F which one of the following must be true about the schedule

(A) The inspection of ei ther G or H is scheduled for day 1

(B ) The in spection of either G or J is sc heduled for day J

(C) The inspection of e ither G or J is sched uled for day 2

(D) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 3

(E) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 4

6 If the inspections of G and of H are scheduled not necessarily in that order for days as far apart as possible wh ich one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the factories anyone of which could be scheduled for inspection for day I

(A) F J (B) G H (C) G H J (D) F G H (E) F G H J

7 If the inspection of G is scheduled for the day immediately before the inspecti on of Q which one of the following could be true

(A) The inspection of G is sched uled for day 5 (B ) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspecti on of J is scheduled for day 2 (D) The inspection of Q is schedu led for day 4 (E) The inspection of R is sched uled for day 3

copy The Princeton Review Inc 65

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 8-13

During a period of seven consecutive days-from day 1 through day 7-seven investors-Fennelly Gupta Hall Jones Knight L6pez and Moss-will each view a building site exactly once Each day exactly one investor will view the site The investors must view the site in accordance with the following cond itions

Fennelly views the site on day 3 or else day 5 Lopez views the site on neither day 4 nor day 6 If Jones views the site on day 1 Hall views the site on

day 2 If Knight views the site on day 4 L6pez views the site on

day 5 Gupta views the site on the day after the day on which

Hall vIews the site

8 Which one of the following could be the order in which the investors view the site from day 1 through day 7

(A) Hall Gupta Fennelly Moss Knight L6pez Jones (B) Hall Gupta Lopez Fennelly Moss Knight Jones (C) L6pez Gupta Hall Moss Fennelly Jones Knight (D) L6pez Jones Fennelly Knight Hall Gupta Moss (E) Lopez Jones Knight Moss Fennelly Hall Gupta

9 If Jones views the site on day 1 which one of the following investors must view the site on day 4

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Knight (D) L6pez (E) Moss

10 If Knight views the site on day 4 and Moss views the site on some day after the day on which Jones views the site which one of the following must be true

(A) Jones views the site on day I (B) Jones views the site on day 2 (C) Jones views the site on day 6 (D) Moss views the site on day 2 (E) Moss views the site on day 6

11 If Hall views the site on day 2 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of investors anyone of whom could be [he investor who views the site on day 4)

(A) Knight (B) Moss (C) Jones Moss (D) Knight Moss (E) Jones Knight Moss

12 If Hall views the site on the day after the day Knight views the site and if Fennelly views the site on the day after the day Lopez views the site then Jones must view the site on day

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5

13 If the day on which Gupta views the site and the day on which L6pez views the site both come at some time before the day on which Fennelly views the site which one of the following is an investor who could view the site on day 3

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Jones (D) Knight (E) Moss

66 I copy The Princewn Review Inc

UNIT 2

Qyestions 14-18

During a single week from Monday through Friday tours will be conducted of a companys three divisions-Operations Production Sales Exactly five tours will be conducted that week one each day The schedule of tours for the week must conform to the following restrictions

Each division is toured at least once The Operations division is not toured on Monday The Production division is not toured on Wednesday The Sales division is toured on two consecutive days and

on no other days If the Operations division is toured on Thursday then the Production division is toured on Friday

14 Which one of the following CANNOT be true of the week s tour schedule

(A) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Tuesday

(B) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Friday

(C) The division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Thursday

CD) The division that is toured on Wednesday is also toured on Friday

(E) The division that is toured on Thursday is also toured on Friday

15 If in addition to the Sales division one other division is toured on two consecutive days then it could be true of the week s tour schedule both that the

(A) Production division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Thursday

(B) Production division is toured on Tuesday and that the Sales division is toured on Wednesday

(C) Operations division is toured on Tuesday and that the Production division is toured on Friday

(D) Sales division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Friday

(E) Sales division is toured on Wednesday and that the ProductlOn division is toured on Friday

16 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured

on Tuesday is also loured on Friday then for which one of the following days must a tour of the Production division be scheduled

CA) Monday (B ) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

17 If in the week s tour schedule the division that is toured on Monday is not the division that is toured on Tuesday then which one of the following could be true of the week s schedule

(A) A tour of the Sales division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(B) A tour of the Operations division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(C) The Sales division is toured on Monday CD) The Production division is toured on Tuesday (E) The Operations division is toured on Wednesday

18 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Wednesday then which one of the following must be true of the weeks tour schedule

(A) The Production division is toured on Monday (B) The Operations division is toured on Tuesday (C) The Sales division is toured on Wednesday (D) The Sales division is toured on Thursday (E) The Production division is toured on Friday

copy The Prmceton Review Inc I 67

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Each of seven television programs-H J L P Q S V-is a different rank from first seventh (from

most popular to least popular) The ranking is consistent with the conditions

J and L are each less popular than H ] is more popular than Q S and V are each less popular than L P and S are each less popular than Q S is not seventh

19 Which one of the could be the order of the to least popular

(A)] L Q V S P (B) H L Q J S P V (Cl H J Q L S V P (D) H 1 V L Q S P (E) H L V 1 P S

20 If J is more popular than L and S is more popular than P then which one of the following must be true of the

(A) J second (B) 1 is third

L is third Q is third P is seventh

21 Which one of the following programs CANNOT be ranked third

(Al L (B) J (C) Q

V P

22 If V is more than Q and J is less than L then which one of the following could be true of the

(A) P is more popular than S S is more popular than V

(C) P is more popular than L ] is more popular than V

(E) Q more popular than V

23 If Q is more than L then each of the must be true of the ranking EXCEPT

(A) H first (B) L is fOUlth

V is not fourth (D) ] is not third

Q is third

68 copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT2

Qlestions 24-28

Five people-Harry Iri s Kate Nancy and Victor-are to be scheduled as contestants on a television show one contestant per day for five consecutive days from Mond ay through Friday The following restrictions governing the scheduling of contestants must be observed

Nancy is not scheduled for Monday If Harry is scheduled for Monday Nancy is scheduled for

Friday If Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday Iris is scheduled for

Monday Kate is scheduled fo r the next day after the day for which

Victor is scheduled

24 Victor can be scheduled for any day EXCEPT

(A) Monday (B) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

25 If Iris is scheduled for the next day after Harry which one of the following lists all [hose days anyone of which could be the day for which Harry is scheduled

(A) Monday Tuesday (B) Monday Wednesday (C) Monday Thursday (D) Monday Tuesday Wednesday (E) M onday Wednesday Thursday

26 If Kate IS scheduled for Wednesday which one of the following could be true

(A) Iri s is scheduled for Friday (B) Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday (C) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Harry is scheduled (D) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Iris is scheduled (E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Kate is scheduled

27 If Kate is scheduled for Friday which one of the fo llowing mu st be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for Tuesday (B) Harry IS scheduled for Wednesday (C) Iri s is scheduled for Monday (D) Iris is scheduled for Wednesday (E) Nancy is scheduled for Wednesday

28 If Iris is scheduled for Wed nesday which one of the following must be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Nancy is scheduled

(B ) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Kate is scheduled

(C) Kate is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Harry is scheduled

CD) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for whi ch Kate is scheduled

(E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Iris is scheduled

copy The Prin ce ton Re VIew In c I 69

l SAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

20 Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-5

There are exactly ten stores and no other buildings on Oak Street On the north side of the street from west to east are stores 1 3 5 7 and 9 on the south side of the street also from west to east are stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 The stores on the north side are located directly across the street from those on the south side facing each other in pairs as follows 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 Each store is decorated with lights in exactly one of the following colors green red and yellow The stores have been decorated with lights according to the following conditions

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of any store adjacent to it

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of the store directly across the street from it

Yellow lights decorate exactly one store on each side of the street

Red lights decorate store 4 Yellow lights decorate store 5

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the colors of the lights that decorate stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 respectively

(A) green red green red green (B) green red green yellow red (C) green red yellow red green (D) yellow green red green red (E) yellow red green red yellow

2 If green lights decorate store 7 then each of the following statements could be false EXCEPT

(A) Green lights decorate store 2 (8) Green lights decorate store 10 (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Red lights decorate store 9 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 2

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Green lights decorate store 10 (B) Red lights decorate store I (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 8 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 10

4 If green lights decorate five stores on the street then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store 9 (8) Red lights decorate store 2 (C) Red lights decorate store 7 (D) Red lights decorate store lO (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

5 Suppose that yeJlow lights decorate exactly two stores not just one on the south side of the street and decorate exactly one store on the north side If all of the other conditions remain the same then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store l (8) Red lights decorate store 7 (C) Red lights decorate store 10 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 2 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

84 I copy The Princeton Review Jnc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Ouestions 6-10

A school has exactly four dormitories that are to be fully occupied-Richards Tuscarora Veblen and Wisteria-each consisting entirely of a North wing and a South wing The following rules govern assignment of students to dormitory wings

Each wing is assigned only male students or only female students

Exactly three wings have males assigned to them Richards North and Tuscarora Nonh are assigned

females If a dormitory has males assigned to one of its wings

then its other wing is assigned females If males are assigned to Veblen South then Wisteria

North is assigned males

6 If females are assigned to Veblen South and Veblen North then which one of the following could be two other wings that are also assigned females

(A) Richards North and Tuscarora South (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Richards South and Tuscarora North (D) Tuscarora North and Wisteria South (E) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South

7 It CANNOT be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria South (8) Richards South and Tuscarora South (C) Richards South and Veblen North (D) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen North and Wisteria South

8 If Wisteria North is assigned females then females must also be assigned to which one of the following

(A) Richards South (8) Wisteria South (C) Tuscarora South (D) Veblen South (E) Veblen North

9 If males are assigned to Veblen South which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the wings that CANNOT be assigned males

(A) Richards North Tuscarora North (8) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North (C) Richards North Tuscarora North Wisteria South (D) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North

Wisteria South (E) Richards North Richards South Tuscarora North

Veblen North Wisteria South

10 If Tuscarora South is assigned females then it could be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria North (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Veblen North and Wisteria North (D) Veblen South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen South and Veblen North

86 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 5: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

-

Seven consecutive time slots for a broadcast numbered in order 1 7 will be filled by six song

lpes~- H L 0 P S--and one news tape Each tape is to be to a different time sIaL and no tape is longer than any other tape The broadcast 1S subiect to the following restrictions

L must be before O The news tape must be at some time after L There must be exactly two time slots between G and P

of whether G comes before P or whether G comes after P

II If G is second which one of the following tapes third

(A) the news H L

(D) 0 (E) S

12 The news tape can be in anyone of the time slots EXCEPT the

(Al ~co~

iliird (C) fuurth (D) fiM (E) sixth

13 If Hand S are to be scheduled as far from each other as then the first the second and the third time slots could be filled ~0~d~~

(A) G H and L (B) S G and the news (C) H G and L (D) H L and 0 (E) L 0 and S

UNIT 1

14 If P is played fifth L must be played

first (B) second (el third

fourth eE) sixth

15 What is the maximum number of tapes that can separate S from the news)

CA) 1 (B) 2

3 (D) 4

5

16 Which one of the is the latest time slot in which L can be played

(Al the third (El the fourth (C) the fifth (D) the sixth (El the seventh

17 The time slot in which 0 must be is determined if G is to which one of the

time slots

CA) the first the third the fourth

(0) the fifth the sixth

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 27

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

A instructor will schedule one lesson for each of six students-Grace Janet Steve Tom and Una-one lesson per for six consecutive days The schedule must conform to the following conditions

lesson is later in the schedule than Janets lesson Unas lesson is later in the schedule than Steves lesson Steves lesson is three after Graces lesson Janets lesson is on the first day or else the third

IS If Janets lesson is scheduled for the first then the lesson for which one of the following students must be scheduled for the sixth day

(A) Grace (8)

Steve Tom

(E) Una

19 For which one of the following students is there an acceptable schedule in which the students lesson is on the third and another schedule in which the students lesson is on the fifth day

(A) Grace (8) (e) Steve (D) Tom

Una

20 Which one of the is a complete and accurate list of the students anyone of whom could be the student whose lesson is scheduled for the second day

(A) Grace (8) Tom

Grace Tom Tom

(E) Grace Henry Tom

21 If lesson is scheduled for a either immediately before or immediately after Toms lesson then Graces lesson must be scheduled for the

(A) first day (B) second day

third day fourlh fifth day

22 If Janets lesson scheduled for the third which one of the following could be true

(A) Graces lesson is scheduled for a later than lesson

Graces lesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

Henrys Jesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

(D) Toms lesson is scheduled for a later day than lesson

(E) Toms lesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

23 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of anyone of which could be the day for which Torns lesson is scheduled

first second third second third fourth second fifth sixth fi rst second third fourth

(E) second third fourth sixth

28 I Prirceton ReView loe

25

UNIT 1 -

Questions 24-28

Exactly seven products-P Q R S T W and X-are each to be advertised exactly once ill a section of a catalog The order in vhich they will be displayed is governed by the following conditions

Q must be displayed in some position before W R must be displayed immediately before X T cannot be displayed immediately before or immediately

after W S must be displayed either first or seventh Either Q or T must be displayed fourth

24 Which one of the following CANNOT be the product that is displayed first

(A) P (B) Q (C) R CD) T (E) X

If X is displayed immediately before Q then which one of the following could be true~

(A ) T is displayed first (B) R is displayed fifth (C) Q is displayed last CD) Q is displayed second (E) P is displayed second

26 If P is displayed second then which one of the following could be displayed third)

(A) R (B) S (C) T CD) W (E) X

27 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Q is displayed fifth (B) Q is displayed seventh (C) R is displayed third (D) W is displayed third (E) X is displayed fifth

28 If R is displayed sixth then which one of the following mu st be displayed fifth~

(A) P (B) Q (C) T (D) W (E) X

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 29

More 10 Order Games Qyestions 1-7

During a period of six consecLl tive days-day 1 through day 6-each of exactly six factories-F G H J Q and R-will be inspected During this period each of the factories wi ll be inspected exactly once one factory per day The sched ule for the inspections must conform to the following conditions

F is inspected on either day 1 or day 6 J is inspected on an earlier day than Q is inspected Q is inspected on the day immediately before R is

inspected If G is inspected on day 3 Q is in spected on day 5

I Which one of the fo llow ing could be a list of the factories in the order of their scheduled inspections from day 1 through day 6

(A) F Q R H J G (B) G H J Q R F (C) G J Q H R F (D) G J Q R F H (E) J H G Q R F

2 Which one of the following must be fal se

(A) The inspection of G is scheduled for day 4 (B) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspection of J is scheduled for day 4 (D) The in spection of Q is scheduled for day 3 (E) The in spection of R is scheduled for day 2

3 The in spection of which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for day 5)

(A) G (B) H (C) J (D) Q (E) R

UNIT2

4 The inspections scheduled for day 3 and day 5 respectively could be those of

(A) G and H (B) G and R (C) Hand G (D) Rand J (E) Rand H

5 If the inspection of R is sched uled for the day immediately before the inspection of F which one of the following must be true about the schedule

(A) The inspection of ei ther G or H is scheduled for day 1

(B ) The in spection of either G or J is sc heduled for day J

(C) The inspection of e ither G or J is sched uled for day 2

(D) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 3

(E) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 4

6 If the inspections of G and of H are scheduled not necessarily in that order for days as far apart as possible wh ich one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the factories anyone of which could be scheduled for inspection for day I

(A) F J (B) G H (C) G H J (D) F G H (E) F G H J

7 If the inspection of G is scheduled for the day immediately before the inspecti on of Q which one of the following could be true

(A) The inspection of G is sched uled for day 5 (B ) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspecti on of J is scheduled for day 2 (D) The inspection of Q is schedu led for day 4 (E) The inspection of R is sched uled for day 3

copy The Princeton Review Inc 65

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 8-13

During a period of seven consecutive days-from day 1 through day 7-seven investors-Fennelly Gupta Hall Jones Knight L6pez and Moss-will each view a building site exactly once Each day exactly one investor will view the site The investors must view the site in accordance with the following cond itions

Fennelly views the site on day 3 or else day 5 Lopez views the site on neither day 4 nor day 6 If Jones views the site on day 1 Hall views the site on

day 2 If Knight views the site on day 4 L6pez views the site on

day 5 Gupta views the site on the day after the day on which

Hall vIews the site

8 Which one of the following could be the order in which the investors view the site from day 1 through day 7

(A) Hall Gupta Fennelly Moss Knight L6pez Jones (B) Hall Gupta Lopez Fennelly Moss Knight Jones (C) L6pez Gupta Hall Moss Fennelly Jones Knight (D) L6pez Jones Fennelly Knight Hall Gupta Moss (E) Lopez Jones Knight Moss Fennelly Hall Gupta

9 If Jones views the site on day 1 which one of the following investors must view the site on day 4

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Knight (D) L6pez (E) Moss

10 If Knight views the site on day 4 and Moss views the site on some day after the day on which Jones views the site which one of the following must be true

(A) Jones views the site on day I (B) Jones views the site on day 2 (C) Jones views the site on day 6 (D) Moss views the site on day 2 (E) Moss views the site on day 6

11 If Hall views the site on day 2 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of investors anyone of whom could be [he investor who views the site on day 4)

(A) Knight (B) Moss (C) Jones Moss (D) Knight Moss (E) Jones Knight Moss

12 If Hall views the site on the day after the day Knight views the site and if Fennelly views the site on the day after the day Lopez views the site then Jones must view the site on day

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5

13 If the day on which Gupta views the site and the day on which L6pez views the site both come at some time before the day on which Fennelly views the site which one of the following is an investor who could view the site on day 3

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Jones (D) Knight (E) Moss

66 I copy The Princewn Review Inc

UNIT 2

Qyestions 14-18

During a single week from Monday through Friday tours will be conducted of a companys three divisions-Operations Production Sales Exactly five tours will be conducted that week one each day The schedule of tours for the week must conform to the following restrictions

Each division is toured at least once The Operations division is not toured on Monday The Production division is not toured on Wednesday The Sales division is toured on two consecutive days and

on no other days If the Operations division is toured on Thursday then the Production division is toured on Friday

14 Which one of the following CANNOT be true of the week s tour schedule

(A) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Tuesday

(B) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Friday

(C) The division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Thursday

CD) The division that is toured on Wednesday is also toured on Friday

(E) The division that is toured on Thursday is also toured on Friday

15 If in addition to the Sales division one other division is toured on two consecutive days then it could be true of the week s tour schedule both that the

(A) Production division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Thursday

(B) Production division is toured on Tuesday and that the Sales division is toured on Wednesday

(C) Operations division is toured on Tuesday and that the Production division is toured on Friday

(D) Sales division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Friday

(E) Sales division is toured on Wednesday and that the ProductlOn division is toured on Friday

16 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured

on Tuesday is also loured on Friday then for which one of the following days must a tour of the Production division be scheduled

CA) Monday (B ) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

17 If in the week s tour schedule the division that is toured on Monday is not the division that is toured on Tuesday then which one of the following could be true of the week s schedule

(A) A tour of the Sales division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(B) A tour of the Operations division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(C) The Sales division is toured on Monday CD) The Production division is toured on Tuesday (E) The Operations division is toured on Wednesday

18 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Wednesday then which one of the following must be true of the weeks tour schedule

(A) The Production division is toured on Monday (B) The Operations division is toured on Tuesday (C) The Sales division is toured on Wednesday (D) The Sales division is toured on Thursday (E) The Production division is toured on Friday

copy The Prmceton Review Inc I 67

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Each of seven television programs-H J L P Q S V-is a different rank from first seventh (from

most popular to least popular) The ranking is consistent with the conditions

J and L are each less popular than H ] is more popular than Q S and V are each less popular than L P and S are each less popular than Q S is not seventh

19 Which one of the could be the order of the to least popular

(A)] L Q V S P (B) H L Q J S P V (Cl H J Q L S V P (D) H 1 V L Q S P (E) H L V 1 P S

20 If J is more popular than L and S is more popular than P then which one of the following must be true of the

(A) J second (B) 1 is third

L is third Q is third P is seventh

21 Which one of the following programs CANNOT be ranked third

(Al L (B) J (C) Q

V P

22 If V is more than Q and J is less than L then which one of the following could be true of the

(A) P is more popular than S S is more popular than V

(C) P is more popular than L ] is more popular than V

(E) Q more popular than V

23 If Q is more than L then each of the must be true of the ranking EXCEPT

(A) H first (B) L is fOUlth

V is not fourth (D) ] is not third

Q is third

68 copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT2

Qlestions 24-28

Five people-Harry Iri s Kate Nancy and Victor-are to be scheduled as contestants on a television show one contestant per day for five consecutive days from Mond ay through Friday The following restrictions governing the scheduling of contestants must be observed

Nancy is not scheduled for Monday If Harry is scheduled for Monday Nancy is scheduled for

Friday If Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday Iris is scheduled for

Monday Kate is scheduled fo r the next day after the day for which

Victor is scheduled

24 Victor can be scheduled for any day EXCEPT

(A) Monday (B) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

25 If Iris is scheduled for the next day after Harry which one of the following lists all [hose days anyone of which could be the day for which Harry is scheduled

(A) Monday Tuesday (B) Monday Wednesday (C) Monday Thursday (D) Monday Tuesday Wednesday (E) M onday Wednesday Thursday

26 If Kate IS scheduled for Wednesday which one of the following could be true

(A) Iri s is scheduled for Friday (B) Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday (C) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Harry is scheduled (D) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Iris is scheduled (E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Kate is scheduled

27 If Kate is scheduled for Friday which one of the fo llowing mu st be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for Tuesday (B) Harry IS scheduled for Wednesday (C) Iri s is scheduled for Monday (D) Iris is scheduled for Wednesday (E) Nancy is scheduled for Wednesday

28 If Iris is scheduled for Wed nesday which one of the following must be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Nancy is scheduled

(B ) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Kate is scheduled

(C) Kate is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Harry is scheduled

CD) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for whi ch Kate is scheduled

(E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Iris is scheduled

copy The Prin ce ton Re VIew In c I 69

l SAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

20 Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-5

There are exactly ten stores and no other buildings on Oak Street On the north side of the street from west to east are stores 1 3 5 7 and 9 on the south side of the street also from west to east are stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 The stores on the north side are located directly across the street from those on the south side facing each other in pairs as follows 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 Each store is decorated with lights in exactly one of the following colors green red and yellow The stores have been decorated with lights according to the following conditions

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of any store adjacent to it

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of the store directly across the street from it

Yellow lights decorate exactly one store on each side of the street

Red lights decorate store 4 Yellow lights decorate store 5

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the colors of the lights that decorate stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 respectively

(A) green red green red green (B) green red green yellow red (C) green red yellow red green (D) yellow green red green red (E) yellow red green red yellow

2 If green lights decorate store 7 then each of the following statements could be false EXCEPT

(A) Green lights decorate store 2 (8) Green lights decorate store 10 (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Red lights decorate store 9 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 2

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Green lights decorate store 10 (B) Red lights decorate store I (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 8 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 10

4 If green lights decorate five stores on the street then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store 9 (8) Red lights decorate store 2 (C) Red lights decorate store 7 (D) Red lights decorate store lO (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

5 Suppose that yeJlow lights decorate exactly two stores not just one on the south side of the street and decorate exactly one store on the north side If all of the other conditions remain the same then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store l (8) Red lights decorate store 7 (C) Red lights decorate store 10 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 2 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

84 I copy The Princeton Review Jnc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Ouestions 6-10

A school has exactly four dormitories that are to be fully occupied-Richards Tuscarora Veblen and Wisteria-each consisting entirely of a North wing and a South wing The following rules govern assignment of students to dormitory wings

Each wing is assigned only male students or only female students

Exactly three wings have males assigned to them Richards North and Tuscarora Nonh are assigned

females If a dormitory has males assigned to one of its wings

then its other wing is assigned females If males are assigned to Veblen South then Wisteria

North is assigned males

6 If females are assigned to Veblen South and Veblen North then which one of the following could be two other wings that are also assigned females

(A) Richards North and Tuscarora South (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Richards South and Tuscarora North (D) Tuscarora North and Wisteria South (E) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South

7 It CANNOT be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria South (8) Richards South and Tuscarora South (C) Richards South and Veblen North (D) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen North and Wisteria South

8 If Wisteria North is assigned females then females must also be assigned to which one of the following

(A) Richards South (8) Wisteria South (C) Tuscarora South (D) Veblen South (E) Veblen North

9 If males are assigned to Veblen South which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the wings that CANNOT be assigned males

(A) Richards North Tuscarora North (8) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North (C) Richards North Tuscarora North Wisteria South (D) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North

Wisteria South (E) Richards North Richards South Tuscarora North

Veblen North Wisteria South

10 If Tuscarora South is assigned females then it could be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria North (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Veblen North and Wisteria North (D) Veblen South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen South and Veblen North

86 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 6: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

A instructor will schedule one lesson for each of six students-Grace Janet Steve Tom and Una-one lesson per for six consecutive days The schedule must conform to the following conditions

lesson is later in the schedule than Janets lesson Unas lesson is later in the schedule than Steves lesson Steves lesson is three after Graces lesson Janets lesson is on the first day or else the third

IS If Janets lesson is scheduled for the first then the lesson for which one of the following students must be scheduled for the sixth day

(A) Grace (8)

Steve Tom

(E) Una

19 For which one of the following students is there an acceptable schedule in which the students lesson is on the third and another schedule in which the students lesson is on the fifth day

(A) Grace (8) (e) Steve (D) Tom

Una

20 Which one of the is a complete and accurate list of the students anyone of whom could be the student whose lesson is scheduled for the second day

(A) Grace (8) Tom

Grace Tom Tom

(E) Grace Henry Tom

21 If lesson is scheduled for a either immediately before or immediately after Toms lesson then Graces lesson must be scheduled for the

(A) first day (B) second day

third day fourlh fifth day

22 If Janets lesson scheduled for the third which one of the following could be true

(A) Graces lesson is scheduled for a later than lesson

Graces lesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

Henrys Jesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

(D) Toms lesson is scheduled for a later day than lesson

(E) Toms lesson is scheduled for a later day than Unas lesson

23 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of anyone of which could be the day for which Torns lesson is scheduled

first second third second third fourth second fifth sixth fi rst second third fourth

(E) second third fourth sixth

28 I Prirceton ReView loe

25

UNIT 1 -

Questions 24-28

Exactly seven products-P Q R S T W and X-are each to be advertised exactly once ill a section of a catalog The order in vhich they will be displayed is governed by the following conditions

Q must be displayed in some position before W R must be displayed immediately before X T cannot be displayed immediately before or immediately

after W S must be displayed either first or seventh Either Q or T must be displayed fourth

24 Which one of the following CANNOT be the product that is displayed first

(A) P (B) Q (C) R CD) T (E) X

If X is displayed immediately before Q then which one of the following could be true~

(A ) T is displayed first (B) R is displayed fifth (C) Q is displayed last CD) Q is displayed second (E) P is displayed second

26 If P is displayed second then which one of the following could be displayed third)

(A) R (B) S (C) T CD) W (E) X

27 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Q is displayed fifth (B) Q is displayed seventh (C) R is displayed third (D) W is displayed third (E) X is displayed fifth

28 If R is displayed sixth then which one of the following mu st be displayed fifth~

(A) P (B) Q (C) T (D) W (E) X

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 29

More 10 Order Games Qyestions 1-7

During a period of six consecLl tive days-day 1 through day 6-each of exactly six factories-F G H J Q and R-will be inspected During this period each of the factories wi ll be inspected exactly once one factory per day The sched ule for the inspections must conform to the following conditions

F is inspected on either day 1 or day 6 J is inspected on an earlier day than Q is inspected Q is inspected on the day immediately before R is

inspected If G is inspected on day 3 Q is in spected on day 5

I Which one of the fo llow ing could be a list of the factories in the order of their scheduled inspections from day 1 through day 6

(A) F Q R H J G (B) G H J Q R F (C) G J Q H R F (D) G J Q R F H (E) J H G Q R F

2 Which one of the following must be fal se

(A) The inspection of G is scheduled for day 4 (B) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspection of J is scheduled for day 4 (D) The in spection of Q is scheduled for day 3 (E) The in spection of R is scheduled for day 2

3 The in spection of which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for day 5)

(A) G (B) H (C) J (D) Q (E) R

UNIT2

4 The inspections scheduled for day 3 and day 5 respectively could be those of

(A) G and H (B) G and R (C) Hand G (D) Rand J (E) Rand H

5 If the inspection of R is sched uled for the day immediately before the inspection of F which one of the following must be true about the schedule

(A) The inspection of ei ther G or H is scheduled for day 1

(B ) The in spection of either G or J is sc heduled for day J

(C) The inspection of e ither G or J is sched uled for day 2

(D) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 3

(E) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 4

6 If the inspections of G and of H are scheduled not necessarily in that order for days as far apart as possible wh ich one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the factories anyone of which could be scheduled for inspection for day I

(A) F J (B) G H (C) G H J (D) F G H (E) F G H J

7 If the inspection of G is scheduled for the day immediately before the inspecti on of Q which one of the following could be true

(A) The inspection of G is sched uled for day 5 (B ) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspecti on of J is scheduled for day 2 (D) The inspection of Q is schedu led for day 4 (E) The inspection of R is sched uled for day 3

copy The Princeton Review Inc 65

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 8-13

During a period of seven consecutive days-from day 1 through day 7-seven investors-Fennelly Gupta Hall Jones Knight L6pez and Moss-will each view a building site exactly once Each day exactly one investor will view the site The investors must view the site in accordance with the following cond itions

Fennelly views the site on day 3 or else day 5 Lopez views the site on neither day 4 nor day 6 If Jones views the site on day 1 Hall views the site on

day 2 If Knight views the site on day 4 L6pez views the site on

day 5 Gupta views the site on the day after the day on which

Hall vIews the site

8 Which one of the following could be the order in which the investors view the site from day 1 through day 7

(A) Hall Gupta Fennelly Moss Knight L6pez Jones (B) Hall Gupta Lopez Fennelly Moss Knight Jones (C) L6pez Gupta Hall Moss Fennelly Jones Knight (D) L6pez Jones Fennelly Knight Hall Gupta Moss (E) Lopez Jones Knight Moss Fennelly Hall Gupta

9 If Jones views the site on day 1 which one of the following investors must view the site on day 4

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Knight (D) L6pez (E) Moss

10 If Knight views the site on day 4 and Moss views the site on some day after the day on which Jones views the site which one of the following must be true

(A) Jones views the site on day I (B) Jones views the site on day 2 (C) Jones views the site on day 6 (D) Moss views the site on day 2 (E) Moss views the site on day 6

11 If Hall views the site on day 2 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of investors anyone of whom could be [he investor who views the site on day 4)

(A) Knight (B) Moss (C) Jones Moss (D) Knight Moss (E) Jones Knight Moss

12 If Hall views the site on the day after the day Knight views the site and if Fennelly views the site on the day after the day Lopez views the site then Jones must view the site on day

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5

13 If the day on which Gupta views the site and the day on which L6pez views the site both come at some time before the day on which Fennelly views the site which one of the following is an investor who could view the site on day 3

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Jones (D) Knight (E) Moss

66 I copy The Princewn Review Inc

UNIT 2

Qyestions 14-18

During a single week from Monday through Friday tours will be conducted of a companys three divisions-Operations Production Sales Exactly five tours will be conducted that week one each day The schedule of tours for the week must conform to the following restrictions

Each division is toured at least once The Operations division is not toured on Monday The Production division is not toured on Wednesday The Sales division is toured on two consecutive days and

on no other days If the Operations division is toured on Thursday then the Production division is toured on Friday

14 Which one of the following CANNOT be true of the week s tour schedule

(A) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Tuesday

(B) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Friday

(C) The division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Thursday

CD) The division that is toured on Wednesday is also toured on Friday

(E) The division that is toured on Thursday is also toured on Friday

15 If in addition to the Sales division one other division is toured on two consecutive days then it could be true of the week s tour schedule both that the

(A) Production division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Thursday

(B) Production division is toured on Tuesday and that the Sales division is toured on Wednesday

(C) Operations division is toured on Tuesday and that the Production division is toured on Friday

(D) Sales division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Friday

(E) Sales division is toured on Wednesday and that the ProductlOn division is toured on Friday

16 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured

on Tuesday is also loured on Friday then for which one of the following days must a tour of the Production division be scheduled

CA) Monday (B ) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

17 If in the week s tour schedule the division that is toured on Monday is not the division that is toured on Tuesday then which one of the following could be true of the week s schedule

(A) A tour of the Sales division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(B) A tour of the Operations division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(C) The Sales division is toured on Monday CD) The Production division is toured on Tuesday (E) The Operations division is toured on Wednesday

18 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Wednesday then which one of the following must be true of the weeks tour schedule

(A) The Production division is toured on Monday (B) The Operations division is toured on Tuesday (C) The Sales division is toured on Wednesday (D) The Sales division is toured on Thursday (E) The Production division is toured on Friday

copy The Prmceton Review Inc I 67

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Each of seven television programs-H J L P Q S V-is a different rank from first seventh (from

most popular to least popular) The ranking is consistent with the conditions

J and L are each less popular than H ] is more popular than Q S and V are each less popular than L P and S are each less popular than Q S is not seventh

19 Which one of the could be the order of the to least popular

(A)] L Q V S P (B) H L Q J S P V (Cl H J Q L S V P (D) H 1 V L Q S P (E) H L V 1 P S

20 If J is more popular than L and S is more popular than P then which one of the following must be true of the

(A) J second (B) 1 is third

L is third Q is third P is seventh

21 Which one of the following programs CANNOT be ranked third

(Al L (B) J (C) Q

V P

22 If V is more than Q and J is less than L then which one of the following could be true of the

(A) P is more popular than S S is more popular than V

(C) P is more popular than L ] is more popular than V

(E) Q more popular than V

23 If Q is more than L then each of the must be true of the ranking EXCEPT

(A) H first (B) L is fOUlth

V is not fourth (D) ] is not third

Q is third

68 copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT2

Qlestions 24-28

Five people-Harry Iri s Kate Nancy and Victor-are to be scheduled as contestants on a television show one contestant per day for five consecutive days from Mond ay through Friday The following restrictions governing the scheduling of contestants must be observed

Nancy is not scheduled for Monday If Harry is scheduled for Monday Nancy is scheduled for

Friday If Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday Iris is scheduled for

Monday Kate is scheduled fo r the next day after the day for which

Victor is scheduled

24 Victor can be scheduled for any day EXCEPT

(A) Monday (B) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

25 If Iris is scheduled for the next day after Harry which one of the following lists all [hose days anyone of which could be the day for which Harry is scheduled

(A) Monday Tuesday (B) Monday Wednesday (C) Monday Thursday (D) Monday Tuesday Wednesday (E) M onday Wednesday Thursday

26 If Kate IS scheduled for Wednesday which one of the following could be true

(A) Iri s is scheduled for Friday (B) Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday (C) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Harry is scheduled (D) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Iris is scheduled (E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Kate is scheduled

27 If Kate is scheduled for Friday which one of the fo llowing mu st be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for Tuesday (B) Harry IS scheduled for Wednesday (C) Iri s is scheduled for Monday (D) Iris is scheduled for Wednesday (E) Nancy is scheduled for Wednesday

28 If Iris is scheduled for Wed nesday which one of the following must be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Nancy is scheduled

(B ) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Kate is scheduled

(C) Kate is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Harry is scheduled

CD) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for whi ch Kate is scheduled

(E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Iris is scheduled

copy The Prin ce ton Re VIew In c I 69

l SAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

20 Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-5

There are exactly ten stores and no other buildings on Oak Street On the north side of the street from west to east are stores 1 3 5 7 and 9 on the south side of the street also from west to east are stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 The stores on the north side are located directly across the street from those on the south side facing each other in pairs as follows 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 Each store is decorated with lights in exactly one of the following colors green red and yellow The stores have been decorated with lights according to the following conditions

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of any store adjacent to it

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of the store directly across the street from it

Yellow lights decorate exactly one store on each side of the street

Red lights decorate store 4 Yellow lights decorate store 5

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the colors of the lights that decorate stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 respectively

(A) green red green red green (B) green red green yellow red (C) green red yellow red green (D) yellow green red green red (E) yellow red green red yellow

2 If green lights decorate store 7 then each of the following statements could be false EXCEPT

(A) Green lights decorate store 2 (8) Green lights decorate store 10 (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Red lights decorate store 9 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 2

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Green lights decorate store 10 (B) Red lights decorate store I (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 8 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 10

4 If green lights decorate five stores on the street then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store 9 (8) Red lights decorate store 2 (C) Red lights decorate store 7 (D) Red lights decorate store lO (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

5 Suppose that yeJlow lights decorate exactly two stores not just one on the south side of the street and decorate exactly one store on the north side If all of the other conditions remain the same then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store l (8) Red lights decorate store 7 (C) Red lights decorate store 10 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 2 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

84 I copy The Princeton Review Jnc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Ouestions 6-10

A school has exactly four dormitories that are to be fully occupied-Richards Tuscarora Veblen and Wisteria-each consisting entirely of a North wing and a South wing The following rules govern assignment of students to dormitory wings

Each wing is assigned only male students or only female students

Exactly three wings have males assigned to them Richards North and Tuscarora Nonh are assigned

females If a dormitory has males assigned to one of its wings

then its other wing is assigned females If males are assigned to Veblen South then Wisteria

North is assigned males

6 If females are assigned to Veblen South and Veblen North then which one of the following could be two other wings that are also assigned females

(A) Richards North and Tuscarora South (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Richards South and Tuscarora North (D) Tuscarora North and Wisteria South (E) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South

7 It CANNOT be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria South (8) Richards South and Tuscarora South (C) Richards South and Veblen North (D) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen North and Wisteria South

8 If Wisteria North is assigned females then females must also be assigned to which one of the following

(A) Richards South (8) Wisteria South (C) Tuscarora South (D) Veblen South (E) Veblen North

9 If males are assigned to Veblen South which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the wings that CANNOT be assigned males

(A) Richards North Tuscarora North (8) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North (C) Richards North Tuscarora North Wisteria South (D) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North

Wisteria South (E) Richards North Richards South Tuscarora North

Veblen North Wisteria South

10 If Tuscarora South is assigned females then it could be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria North (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Veblen North and Wisteria North (D) Veblen South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen South and Veblen North

86 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 7: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

25

UNIT 1 -

Questions 24-28

Exactly seven products-P Q R S T W and X-are each to be advertised exactly once ill a section of a catalog The order in vhich they will be displayed is governed by the following conditions

Q must be displayed in some position before W R must be displayed immediately before X T cannot be displayed immediately before or immediately

after W S must be displayed either first or seventh Either Q or T must be displayed fourth

24 Which one of the following CANNOT be the product that is displayed first

(A) P (B) Q (C) R CD) T (E) X

If X is displayed immediately before Q then which one of the following could be true~

(A ) T is displayed first (B) R is displayed fifth (C) Q is displayed last CD) Q is displayed second (E) P is displayed second

26 If P is displayed second then which one of the following could be displayed third)

(A) R (B) S (C) T CD) W (E) X

27 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Q is displayed fifth (B) Q is displayed seventh (C) R is displayed third (D) W is displayed third (E) X is displayed fifth

28 If R is displayed sixth then which one of the following mu st be displayed fifth~

(A) P (B) Q (C) T (D) W (E) X

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 29

More 10 Order Games Qyestions 1-7

During a period of six consecLl tive days-day 1 through day 6-each of exactly six factories-F G H J Q and R-will be inspected During this period each of the factories wi ll be inspected exactly once one factory per day The sched ule for the inspections must conform to the following conditions

F is inspected on either day 1 or day 6 J is inspected on an earlier day than Q is inspected Q is inspected on the day immediately before R is

inspected If G is inspected on day 3 Q is in spected on day 5

I Which one of the fo llow ing could be a list of the factories in the order of their scheduled inspections from day 1 through day 6

(A) F Q R H J G (B) G H J Q R F (C) G J Q H R F (D) G J Q R F H (E) J H G Q R F

2 Which one of the following must be fal se

(A) The inspection of G is scheduled for day 4 (B) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspection of J is scheduled for day 4 (D) The in spection of Q is scheduled for day 3 (E) The in spection of R is scheduled for day 2

3 The in spection of which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for day 5)

(A) G (B) H (C) J (D) Q (E) R

UNIT2

4 The inspections scheduled for day 3 and day 5 respectively could be those of

(A) G and H (B) G and R (C) Hand G (D) Rand J (E) Rand H

5 If the inspection of R is sched uled for the day immediately before the inspection of F which one of the following must be true about the schedule

(A) The inspection of ei ther G or H is scheduled for day 1

(B ) The in spection of either G or J is sc heduled for day J

(C) The inspection of e ither G or J is sched uled for day 2

(D) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 3

(E) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 4

6 If the inspections of G and of H are scheduled not necessarily in that order for days as far apart as possible wh ich one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the factories anyone of which could be scheduled for inspection for day I

(A) F J (B) G H (C) G H J (D) F G H (E) F G H J

7 If the inspection of G is scheduled for the day immediately before the inspecti on of Q which one of the following could be true

(A) The inspection of G is sched uled for day 5 (B ) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspecti on of J is scheduled for day 2 (D) The inspection of Q is schedu led for day 4 (E) The inspection of R is sched uled for day 3

copy The Princeton Review Inc 65

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 8-13

During a period of seven consecutive days-from day 1 through day 7-seven investors-Fennelly Gupta Hall Jones Knight L6pez and Moss-will each view a building site exactly once Each day exactly one investor will view the site The investors must view the site in accordance with the following cond itions

Fennelly views the site on day 3 or else day 5 Lopez views the site on neither day 4 nor day 6 If Jones views the site on day 1 Hall views the site on

day 2 If Knight views the site on day 4 L6pez views the site on

day 5 Gupta views the site on the day after the day on which

Hall vIews the site

8 Which one of the following could be the order in which the investors view the site from day 1 through day 7

(A) Hall Gupta Fennelly Moss Knight L6pez Jones (B) Hall Gupta Lopez Fennelly Moss Knight Jones (C) L6pez Gupta Hall Moss Fennelly Jones Knight (D) L6pez Jones Fennelly Knight Hall Gupta Moss (E) Lopez Jones Knight Moss Fennelly Hall Gupta

9 If Jones views the site on day 1 which one of the following investors must view the site on day 4

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Knight (D) L6pez (E) Moss

10 If Knight views the site on day 4 and Moss views the site on some day after the day on which Jones views the site which one of the following must be true

(A) Jones views the site on day I (B) Jones views the site on day 2 (C) Jones views the site on day 6 (D) Moss views the site on day 2 (E) Moss views the site on day 6

11 If Hall views the site on day 2 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of investors anyone of whom could be [he investor who views the site on day 4)

(A) Knight (B) Moss (C) Jones Moss (D) Knight Moss (E) Jones Knight Moss

12 If Hall views the site on the day after the day Knight views the site and if Fennelly views the site on the day after the day Lopez views the site then Jones must view the site on day

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5

13 If the day on which Gupta views the site and the day on which L6pez views the site both come at some time before the day on which Fennelly views the site which one of the following is an investor who could view the site on day 3

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Jones (D) Knight (E) Moss

66 I copy The Princewn Review Inc

UNIT 2

Qyestions 14-18

During a single week from Monday through Friday tours will be conducted of a companys three divisions-Operations Production Sales Exactly five tours will be conducted that week one each day The schedule of tours for the week must conform to the following restrictions

Each division is toured at least once The Operations division is not toured on Monday The Production division is not toured on Wednesday The Sales division is toured on two consecutive days and

on no other days If the Operations division is toured on Thursday then the Production division is toured on Friday

14 Which one of the following CANNOT be true of the week s tour schedule

(A) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Tuesday

(B) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Friday

(C) The division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Thursday

CD) The division that is toured on Wednesday is also toured on Friday

(E) The division that is toured on Thursday is also toured on Friday

15 If in addition to the Sales division one other division is toured on two consecutive days then it could be true of the week s tour schedule both that the

(A) Production division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Thursday

(B) Production division is toured on Tuesday and that the Sales division is toured on Wednesday

(C) Operations division is toured on Tuesday and that the Production division is toured on Friday

(D) Sales division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Friday

(E) Sales division is toured on Wednesday and that the ProductlOn division is toured on Friday

16 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured

on Tuesday is also loured on Friday then for which one of the following days must a tour of the Production division be scheduled

CA) Monday (B ) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

17 If in the week s tour schedule the division that is toured on Monday is not the division that is toured on Tuesday then which one of the following could be true of the week s schedule

(A) A tour of the Sales division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(B) A tour of the Operations division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(C) The Sales division is toured on Monday CD) The Production division is toured on Tuesday (E) The Operations division is toured on Wednesday

18 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Wednesday then which one of the following must be true of the weeks tour schedule

(A) The Production division is toured on Monday (B) The Operations division is toured on Tuesday (C) The Sales division is toured on Wednesday (D) The Sales division is toured on Thursday (E) The Production division is toured on Friday

copy The Prmceton Review Inc I 67

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Each of seven television programs-H J L P Q S V-is a different rank from first seventh (from

most popular to least popular) The ranking is consistent with the conditions

J and L are each less popular than H ] is more popular than Q S and V are each less popular than L P and S are each less popular than Q S is not seventh

19 Which one of the could be the order of the to least popular

(A)] L Q V S P (B) H L Q J S P V (Cl H J Q L S V P (D) H 1 V L Q S P (E) H L V 1 P S

20 If J is more popular than L and S is more popular than P then which one of the following must be true of the

(A) J second (B) 1 is third

L is third Q is third P is seventh

21 Which one of the following programs CANNOT be ranked third

(Al L (B) J (C) Q

V P

22 If V is more than Q and J is less than L then which one of the following could be true of the

(A) P is more popular than S S is more popular than V

(C) P is more popular than L ] is more popular than V

(E) Q more popular than V

23 If Q is more than L then each of the must be true of the ranking EXCEPT

(A) H first (B) L is fOUlth

V is not fourth (D) ] is not third

Q is third

68 copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT2

Qlestions 24-28

Five people-Harry Iri s Kate Nancy and Victor-are to be scheduled as contestants on a television show one contestant per day for five consecutive days from Mond ay through Friday The following restrictions governing the scheduling of contestants must be observed

Nancy is not scheduled for Monday If Harry is scheduled for Monday Nancy is scheduled for

Friday If Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday Iris is scheduled for

Monday Kate is scheduled fo r the next day after the day for which

Victor is scheduled

24 Victor can be scheduled for any day EXCEPT

(A) Monday (B) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

25 If Iris is scheduled for the next day after Harry which one of the following lists all [hose days anyone of which could be the day for which Harry is scheduled

(A) Monday Tuesday (B) Monday Wednesday (C) Monday Thursday (D) Monday Tuesday Wednesday (E) M onday Wednesday Thursday

26 If Kate IS scheduled for Wednesday which one of the following could be true

(A) Iri s is scheduled for Friday (B) Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday (C) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Harry is scheduled (D) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Iris is scheduled (E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Kate is scheduled

27 If Kate is scheduled for Friday which one of the fo llowing mu st be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for Tuesday (B) Harry IS scheduled for Wednesday (C) Iri s is scheduled for Monday (D) Iris is scheduled for Wednesday (E) Nancy is scheduled for Wednesday

28 If Iris is scheduled for Wed nesday which one of the following must be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Nancy is scheduled

(B ) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Kate is scheduled

(C) Kate is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Harry is scheduled

CD) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for whi ch Kate is scheduled

(E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Iris is scheduled

copy The Prin ce ton Re VIew In c I 69

l SAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

20 Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-5

There are exactly ten stores and no other buildings on Oak Street On the north side of the street from west to east are stores 1 3 5 7 and 9 on the south side of the street also from west to east are stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 The stores on the north side are located directly across the street from those on the south side facing each other in pairs as follows 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 Each store is decorated with lights in exactly one of the following colors green red and yellow The stores have been decorated with lights according to the following conditions

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of any store adjacent to it

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of the store directly across the street from it

Yellow lights decorate exactly one store on each side of the street

Red lights decorate store 4 Yellow lights decorate store 5

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the colors of the lights that decorate stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 respectively

(A) green red green red green (B) green red green yellow red (C) green red yellow red green (D) yellow green red green red (E) yellow red green red yellow

2 If green lights decorate store 7 then each of the following statements could be false EXCEPT

(A) Green lights decorate store 2 (8) Green lights decorate store 10 (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Red lights decorate store 9 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 2

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Green lights decorate store 10 (B) Red lights decorate store I (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 8 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 10

4 If green lights decorate five stores on the street then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store 9 (8) Red lights decorate store 2 (C) Red lights decorate store 7 (D) Red lights decorate store lO (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

5 Suppose that yeJlow lights decorate exactly two stores not just one on the south side of the street and decorate exactly one store on the north side If all of the other conditions remain the same then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store l (8) Red lights decorate store 7 (C) Red lights decorate store 10 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 2 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

84 I copy The Princeton Review Jnc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Ouestions 6-10

A school has exactly four dormitories that are to be fully occupied-Richards Tuscarora Veblen and Wisteria-each consisting entirely of a North wing and a South wing The following rules govern assignment of students to dormitory wings

Each wing is assigned only male students or only female students

Exactly three wings have males assigned to them Richards North and Tuscarora Nonh are assigned

females If a dormitory has males assigned to one of its wings

then its other wing is assigned females If males are assigned to Veblen South then Wisteria

North is assigned males

6 If females are assigned to Veblen South and Veblen North then which one of the following could be two other wings that are also assigned females

(A) Richards North and Tuscarora South (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Richards South and Tuscarora North (D) Tuscarora North and Wisteria South (E) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South

7 It CANNOT be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria South (8) Richards South and Tuscarora South (C) Richards South and Veblen North (D) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen North and Wisteria South

8 If Wisteria North is assigned females then females must also be assigned to which one of the following

(A) Richards South (8) Wisteria South (C) Tuscarora South (D) Veblen South (E) Veblen North

9 If males are assigned to Veblen South which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the wings that CANNOT be assigned males

(A) Richards North Tuscarora North (8) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North (C) Richards North Tuscarora North Wisteria South (D) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North

Wisteria South (E) Richards North Richards South Tuscarora North

Veblen North Wisteria South

10 If Tuscarora South is assigned females then it could be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria North (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Veblen North and Wisteria North (D) Veblen South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen South and Veblen North

86 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 8: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

More 10 Order Games Qyestions 1-7

During a period of six consecLl tive days-day 1 through day 6-each of exactly six factories-F G H J Q and R-will be inspected During this period each of the factories wi ll be inspected exactly once one factory per day The sched ule for the inspections must conform to the following conditions

F is inspected on either day 1 or day 6 J is inspected on an earlier day than Q is inspected Q is inspected on the day immediately before R is

inspected If G is inspected on day 3 Q is in spected on day 5

I Which one of the fo llow ing could be a list of the factories in the order of their scheduled inspections from day 1 through day 6

(A) F Q R H J G (B) G H J Q R F (C) G J Q H R F (D) G J Q R F H (E) J H G Q R F

2 Which one of the following must be fal se

(A) The inspection of G is scheduled for day 4 (B) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspection of J is scheduled for day 4 (D) The in spection of Q is scheduled for day 3 (E) The in spection of R is scheduled for day 2

3 The in spection of which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for day 5)

(A) G (B) H (C) J (D) Q (E) R

UNIT2

4 The inspections scheduled for day 3 and day 5 respectively could be those of

(A) G and H (B) G and R (C) Hand G (D) Rand J (E) Rand H

5 If the inspection of R is sched uled for the day immediately before the inspection of F which one of the following must be true about the schedule

(A) The inspection of ei ther G or H is scheduled for day 1

(B ) The in spection of either G or J is sc heduled for day J

(C) The inspection of e ither G or J is sched uled for day 2

(D) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 3

(E) The inspection of either H or J is scheduled for day 4

6 If the inspections of G and of H are scheduled not necessarily in that order for days as far apart as possible wh ich one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the factories anyone of which could be scheduled for inspection for day I

(A) F J (B) G H (C) G H J (D) F G H (E) F G H J

7 If the inspection of G is scheduled for the day immediately before the inspecti on of Q which one of the following could be true

(A) The inspection of G is sched uled for day 5 (B ) The inspection of H is scheduled for day 6 (C) The inspecti on of J is scheduled for day 2 (D) The inspection of Q is schedu led for day 4 (E) The inspection of R is sched uled for day 3

copy The Princeton Review Inc 65

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 8-13

During a period of seven consecutive days-from day 1 through day 7-seven investors-Fennelly Gupta Hall Jones Knight L6pez and Moss-will each view a building site exactly once Each day exactly one investor will view the site The investors must view the site in accordance with the following cond itions

Fennelly views the site on day 3 or else day 5 Lopez views the site on neither day 4 nor day 6 If Jones views the site on day 1 Hall views the site on

day 2 If Knight views the site on day 4 L6pez views the site on

day 5 Gupta views the site on the day after the day on which

Hall vIews the site

8 Which one of the following could be the order in which the investors view the site from day 1 through day 7

(A) Hall Gupta Fennelly Moss Knight L6pez Jones (B) Hall Gupta Lopez Fennelly Moss Knight Jones (C) L6pez Gupta Hall Moss Fennelly Jones Knight (D) L6pez Jones Fennelly Knight Hall Gupta Moss (E) Lopez Jones Knight Moss Fennelly Hall Gupta

9 If Jones views the site on day 1 which one of the following investors must view the site on day 4

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Knight (D) L6pez (E) Moss

10 If Knight views the site on day 4 and Moss views the site on some day after the day on which Jones views the site which one of the following must be true

(A) Jones views the site on day I (B) Jones views the site on day 2 (C) Jones views the site on day 6 (D) Moss views the site on day 2 (E) Moss views the site on day 6

11 If Hall views the site on day 2 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of investors anyone of whom could be [he investor who views the site on day 4)

(A) Knight (B) Moss (C) Jones Moss (D) Knight Moss (E) Jones Knight Moss

12 If Hall views the site on the day after the day Knight views the site and if Fennelly views the site on the day after the day Lopez views the site then Jones must view the site on day

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5

13 If the day on which Gupta views the site and the day on which L6pez views the site both come at some time before the day on which Fennelly views the site which one of the following is an investor who could view the site on day 3

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Jones (D) Knight (E) Moss

66 I copy The Princewn Review Inc

UNIT 2

Qyestions 14-18

During a single week from Monday through Friday tours will be conducted of a companys three divisions-Operations Production Sales Exactly five tours will be conducted that week one each day The schedule of tours for the week must conform to the following restrictions

Each division is toured at least once The Operations division is not toured on Monday The Production division is not toured on Wednesday The Sales division is toured on two consecutive days and

on no other days If the Operations division is toured on Thursday then the Production division is toured on Friday

14 Which one of the following CANNOT be true of the week s tour schedule

(A) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Tuesday

(B) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Friday

(C) The division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Thursday

CD) The division that is toured on Wednesday is also toured on Friday

(E) The division that is toured on Thursday is also toured on Friday

15 If in addition to the Sales division one other division is toured on two consecutive days then it could be true of the week s tour schedule both that the

(A) Production division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Thursday

(B) Production division is toured on Tuesday and that the Sales division is toured on Wednesday

(C) Operations division is toured on Tuesday and that the Production division is toured on Friday

(D) Sales division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Friday

(E) Sales division is toured on Wednesday and that the ProductlOn division is toured on Friday

16 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured

on Tuesday is also loured on Friday then for which one of the following days must a tour of the Production division be scheduled

CA) Monday (B ) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

17 If in the week s tour schedule the division that is toured on Monday is not the division that is toured on Tuesday then which one of the following could be true of the week s schedule

(A) A tour of the Sales division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(B) A tour of the Operations division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(C) The Sales division is toured on Monday CD) The Production division is toured on Tuesday (E) The Operations division is toured on Wednesday

18 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Wednesday then which one of the following must be true of the weeks tour schedule

(A) The Production division is toured on Monday (B) The Operations division is toured on Tuesday (C) The Sales division is toured on Wednesday (D) The Sales division is toured on Thursday (E) The Production division is toured on Friday

copy The Prmceton Review Inc I 67

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Each of seven television programs-H J L P Q S V-is a different rank from first seventh (from

most popular to least popular) The ranking is consistent with the conditions

J and L are each less popular than H ] is more popular than Q S and V are each less popular than L P and S are each less popular than Q S is not seventh

19 Which one of the could be the order of the to least popular

(A)] L Q V S P (B) H L Q J S P V (Cl H J Q L S V P (D) H 1 V L Q S P (E) H L V 1 P S

20 If J is more popular than L and S is more popular than P then which one of the following must be true of the

(A) J second (B) 1 is third

L is third Q is third P is seventh

21 Which one of the following programs CANNOT be ranked third

(Al L (B) J (C) Q

V P

22 If V is more than Q and J is less than L then which one of the following could be true of the

(A) P is more popular than S S is more popular than V

(C) P is more popular than L ] is more popular than V

(E) Q more popular than V

23 If Q is more than L then each of the must be true of the ranking EXCEPT

(A) H first (B) L is fOUlth

V is not fourth (D) ] is not third

Q is third

68 copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT2

Qlestions 24-28

Five people-Harry Iri s Kate Nancy and Victor-are to be scheduled as contestants on a television show one contestant per day for five consecutive days from Mond ay through Friday The following restrictions governing the scheduling of contestants must be observed

Nancy is not scheduled for Monday If Harry is scheduled for Monday Nancy is scheduled for

Friday If Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday Iris is scheduled for

Monday Kate is scheduled fo r the next day after the day for which

Victor is scheduled

24 Victor can be scheduled for any day EXCEPT

(A) Monday (B) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

25 If Iris is scheduled for the next day after Harry which one of the following lists all [hose days anyone of which could be the day for which Harry is scheduled

(A) Monday Tuesday (B) Monday Wednesday (C) Monday Thursday (D) Monday Tuesday Wednesday (E) M onday Wednesday Thursday

26 If Kate IS scheduled for Wednesday which one of the following could be true

(A) Iri s is scheduled for Friday (B) Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday (C) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Harry is scheduled (D) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Iris is scheduled (E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Kate is scheduled

27 If Kate is scheduled for Friday which one of the fo llowing mu st be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for Tuesday (B) Harry IS scheduled for Wednesday (C) Iri s is scheduled for Monday (D) Iris is scheduled for Wednesday (E) Nancy is scheduled for Wednesday

28 If Iris is scheduled for Wed nesday which one of the following must be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Nancy is scheduled

(B ) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Kate is scheduled

(C) Kate is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Harry is scheduled

CD) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for whi ch Kate is scheduled

(E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Iris is scheduled

copy The Prin ce ton Re VIew In c I 69

l SAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

20 Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-5

There are exactly ten stores and no other buildings on Oak Street On the north side of the street from west to east are stores 1 3 5 7 and 9 on the south side of the street also from west to east are stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 The stores on the north side are located directly across the street from those on the south side facing each other in pairs as follows 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 Each store is decorated with lights in exactly one of the following colors green red and yellow The stores have been decorated with lights according to the following conditions

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of any store adjacent to it

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of the store directly across the street from it

Yellow lights decorate exactly one store on each side of the street

Red lights decorate store 4 Yellow lights decorate store 5

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the colors of the lights that decorate stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 respectively

(A) green red green red green (B) green red green yellow red (C) green red yellow red green (D) yellow green red green red (E) yellow red green red yellow

2 If green lights decorate store 7 then each of the following statements could be false EXCEPT

(A) Green lights decorate store 2 (8) Green lights decorate store 10 (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Red lights decorate store 9 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 2

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Green lights decorate store 10 (B) Red lights decorate store I (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 8 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 10

4 If green lights decorate five stores on the street then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store 9 (8) Red lights decorate store 2 (C) Red lights decorate store 7 (D) Red lights decorate store lO (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

5 Suppose that yeJlow lights decorate exactly two stores not just one on the south side of the street and decorate exactly one store on the north side If all of the other conditions remain the same then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store l (8) Red lights decorate store 7 (C) Red lights decorate store 10 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 2 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

84 I copy The Princeton Review Jnc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Ouestions 6-10

A school has exactly four dormitories that are to be fully occupied-Richards Tuscarora Veblen and Wisteria-each consisting entirely of a North wing and a South wing The following rules govern assignment of students to dormitory wings

Each wing is assigned only male students or only female students

Exactly three wings have males assigned to them Richards North and Tuscarora Nonh are assigned

females If a dormitory has males assigned to one of its wings

then its other wing is assigned females If males are assigned to Veblen South then Wisteria

North is assigned males

6 If females are assigned to Veblen South and Veblen North then which one of the following could be two other wings that are also assigned females

(A) Richards North and Tuscarora South (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Richards South and Tuscarora North (D) Tuscarora North and Wisteria South (E) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South

7 It CANNOT be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria South (8) Richards South and Tuscarora South (C) Richards South and Veblen North (D) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen North and Wisteria South

8 If Wisteria North is assigned females then females must also be assigned to which one of the following

(A) Richards South (8) Wisteria South (C) Tuscarora South (D) Veblen South (E) Veblen North

9 If males are assigned to Veblen South which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the wings that CANNOT be assigned males

(A) Richards North Tuscarora North (8) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North (C) Richards North Tuscarora North Wisteria South (D) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North

Wisteria South (E) Richards North Richards South Tuscarora North

Veblen North Wisteria South

10 If Tuscarora South is assigned females then it could be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria North (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Veblen North and Wisteria North (D) Veblen South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen South and Veblen North

86 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 9: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 8-13

During a period of seven consecutive days-from day 1 through day 7-seven investors-Fennelly Gupta Hall Jones Knight L6pez and Moss-will each view a building site exactly once Each day exactly one investor will view the site The investors must view the site in accordance with the following cond itions

Fennelly views the site on day 3 or else day 5 Lopez views the site on neither day 4 nor day 6 If Jones views the site on day 1 Hall views the site on

day 2 If Knight views the site on day 4 L6pez views the site on

day 5 Gupta views the site on the day after the day on which

Hall vIews the site

8 Which one of the following could be the order in which the investors view the site from day 1 through day 7

(A) Hall Gupta Fennelly Moss Knight L6pez Jones (B) Hall Gupta Lopez Fennelly Moss Knight Jones (C) L6pez Gupta Hall Moss Fennelly Jones Knight (D) L6pez Jones Fennelly Knight Hall Gupta Moss (E) Lopez Jones Knight Moss Fennelly Hall Gupta

9 If Jones views the site on day 1 which one of the following investors must view the site on day 4

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Knight (D) L6pez (E) Moss

10 If Knight views the site on day 4 and Moss views the site on some day after the day on which Jones views the site which one of the following must be true

(A) Jones views the site on day I (B) Jones views the site on day 2 (C) Jones views the site on day 6 (D) Moss views the site on day 2 (E) Moss views the site on day 6

11 If Hall views the site on day 2 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of investors anyone of whom could be [he investor who views the site on day 4)

(A) Knight (B) Moss (C) Jones Moss (D) Knight Moss (E) Jones Knight Moss

12 If Hall views the site on the day after the day Knight views the site and if Fennelly views the site on the day after the day Lopez views the site then Jones must view the site on day

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 5

13 If the day on which Gupta views the site and the day on which L6pez views the site both come at some time before the day on which Fennelly views the site which one of the following is an investor who could view the site on day 3

(A) Fennelly (B) Gupta (C) Jones (D) Knight (E) Moss

66 I copy The Princewn Review Inc

UNIT 2

Qyestions 14-18

During a single week from Monday through Friday tours will be conducted of a companys three divisions-Operations Production Sales Exactly five tours will be conducted that week one each day The schedule of tours for the week must conform to the following restrictions

Each division is toured at least once The Operations division is not toured on Monday The Production division is not toured on Wednesday The Sales division is toured on two consecutive days and

on no other days If the Operations division is toured on Thursday then the Production division is toured on Friday

14 Which one of the following CANNOT be true of the week s tour schedule

(A) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Tuesday

(B) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Friday

(C) The division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Thursday

CD) The division that is toured on Wednesday is also toured on Friday

(E) The division that is toured on Thursday is also toured on Friday

15 If in addition to the Sales division one other division is toured on two consecutive days then it could be true of the week s tour schedule both that the

(A) Production division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Thursday

(B) Production division is toured on Tuesday and that the Sales division is toured on Wednesday

(C) Operations division is toured on Tuesday and that the Production division is toured on Friday

(D) Sales division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Friday

(E) Sales division is toured on Wednesday and that the ProductlOn division is toured on Friday

16 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured

on Tuesday is also loured on Friday then for which one of the following days must a tour of the Production division be scheduled

CA) Monday (B ) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

17 If in the week s tour schedule the division that is toured on Monday is not the division that is toured on Tuesday then which one of the following could be true of the week s schedule

(A) A tour of the Sales division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(B) A tour of the Operations division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(C) The Sales division is toured on Monday CD) The Production division is toured on Tuesday (E) The Operations division is toured on Wednesday

18 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Wednesday then which one of the following must be true of the weeks tour schedule

(A) The Production division is toured on Monday (B) The Operations division is toured on Tuesday (C) The Sales division is toured on Wednesday (D) The Sales division is toured on Thursday (E) The Production division is toured on Friday

copy The Prmceton Review Inc I 67

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Each of seven television programs-H J L P Q S V-is a different rank from first seventh (from

most popular to least popular) The ranking is consistent with the conditions

J and L are each less popular than H ] is more popular than Q S and V are each less popular than L P and S are each less popular than Q S is not seventh

19 Which one of the could be the order of the to least popular

(A)] L Q V S P (B) H L Q J S P V (Cl H J Q L S V P (D) H 1 V L Q S P (E) H L V 1 P S

20 If J is more popular than L and S is more popular than P then which one of the following must be true of the

(A) J second (B) 1 is third

L is third Q is third P is seventh

21 Which one of the following programs CANNOT be ranked third

(Al L (B) J (C) Q

V P

22 If V is more than Q and J is less than L then which one of the following could be true of the

(A) P is more popular than S S is more popular than V

(C) P is more popular than L ] is more popular than V

(E) Q more popular than V

23 If Q is more than L then each of the must be true of the ranking EXCEPT

(A) H first (B) L is fOUlth

V is not fourth (D) ] is not third

Q is third

68 copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT2

Qlestions 24-28

Five people-Harry Iri s Kate Nancy and Victor-are to be scheduled as contestants on a television show one contestant per day for five consecutive days from Mond ay through Friday The following restrictions governing the scheduling of contestants must be observed

Nancy is not scheduled for Monday If Harry is scheduled for Monday Nancy is scheduled for

Friday If Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday Iris is scheduled for

Monday Kate is scheduled fo r the next day after the day for which

Victor is scheduled

24 Victor can be scheduled for any day EXCEPT

(A) Monday (B) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

25 If Iris is scheduled for the next day after Harry which one of the following lists all [hose days anyone of which could be the day for which Harry is scheduled

(A) Monday Tuesday (B) Monday Wednesday (C) Monday Thursday (D) Monday Tuesday Wednesday (E) M onday Wednesday Thursday

26 If Kate IS scheduled for Wednesday which one of the following could be true

(A) Iri s is scheduled for Friday (B) Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday (C) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Harry is scheduled (D) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Iris is scheduled (E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Kate is scheduled

27 If Kate is scheduled for Friday which one of the fo llowing mu st be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for Tuesday (B) Harry IS scheduled for Wednesday (C) Iri s is scheduled for Monday (D) Iris is scheduled for Wednesday (E) Nancy is scheduled for Wednesday

28 If Iris is scheduled for Wed nesday which one of the following must be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Nancy is scheduled

(B ) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Kate is scheduled

(C) Kate is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Harry is scheduled

CD) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for whi ch Kate is scheduled

(E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Iris is scheduled

copy The Prin ce ton Re VIew In c I 69

l SAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

20 Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-5

There are exactly ten stores and no other buildings on Oak Street On the north side of the street from west to east are stores 1 3 5 7 and 9 on the south side of the street also from west to east are stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 The stores on the north side are located directly across the street from those on the south side facing each other in pairs as follows 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 Each store is decorated with lights in exactly one of the following colors green red and yellow The stores have been decorated with lights according to the following conditions

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of any store adjacent to it

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of the store directly across the street from it

Yellow lights decorate exactly one store on each side of the street

Red lights decorate store 4 Yellow lights decorate store 5

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the colors of the lights that decorate stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 respectively

(A) green red green red green (B) green red green yellow red (C) green red yellow red green (D) yellow green red green red (E) yellow red green red yellow

2 If green lights decorate store 7 then each of the following statements could be false EXCEPT

(A) Green lights decorate store 2 (8) Green lights decorate store 10 (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Red lights decorate store 9 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 2

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Green lights decorate store 10 (B) Red lights decorate store I (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 8 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 10

4 If green lights decorate five stores on the street then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store 9 (8) Red lights decorate store 2 (C) Red lights decorate store 7 (D) Red lights decorate store lO (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

5 Suppose that yeJlow lights decorate exactly two stores not just one on the south side of the street and decorate exactly one store on the north side If all of the other conditions remain the same then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store l (8) Red lights decorate store 7 (C) Red lights decorate store 10 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 2 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

84 I copy The Princeton Review Jnc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Ouestions 6-10

A school has exactly four dormitories that are to be fully occupied-Richards Tuscarora Veblen and Wisteria-each consisting entirely of a North wing and a South wing The following rules govern assignment of students to dormitory wings

Each wing is assigned only male students or only female students

Exactly three wings have males assigned to them Richards North and Tuscarora Nonh are assigned

females If a dormitory has males assigned to one of its wings

then its other wing is assigned females If males are assigned to Veblen South then Wisteria

North is assigned males

6 If females are assigned to Veblen South and Veblen North then which one of the following could be two other wings that are also assigned females

(A) Richards North and Tuscarora South (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Richards South and Tuscarora North (D) Tuscarora North and Wisteria South (E) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South

7 It CANNOT be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria South (8) Richards South and Tuscarora South (C) Richards South and Veblen North (D) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen North and Wisteria South

8 If Wisteria North is assigned females then females must also be assigned to which one of the following

(A) Richards South (8) Wisteria South (C) Tuscarora South (D) Veblen South (E) Veblen North

9 If males are assigned to Veblen South which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the wings that CANNOT be assigned males

(A) Richards North Tuscarora North (8) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North (C) Richards North Tuscarora North Wisteria South (D) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North

Wisteria South (E) Richards North Richards South Tuscarora North

Veblen North Wisteria South

10 If Tuscarora South is assigned females then it could be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria North (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Veblen North and Wisteria North (D) Veblen South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen South and Veblen North

86 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 10: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT 2

Qyestions 14-18

During a single week from Monday through Friday tours will be conducted of a companys three divisions-Operations Production Sales Exactly five tours will be conducted that week one each day The schedule of tours for the week must conform to the following restrictions

Each division is toured at least once The Operations division is not toured on Monday The Production division is not toured on Wednesday The Sales division is toured on two consecutive days and

on no other days If the Operations division is toured on Thursday then the Production division is toured on Friday

14 Which one of the following CANNOT be true of the week s tour schedule

(A) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Tuesday

(B) The division that is toured on Monday is also toured on Friday

(C) The division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Thursday

CD) The division that is toured on Wednesday is also toured on Friday

(E) The division that is toured on Thursday is also toured on Friday

15 If in addition to the Sales division one other division is toured on two consecutive days then it could be true of the week s tour schedule both that the

(A) Production division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Thursday

(B) Production division is toured on Tuesday and that the Sales division is toured on Wednesday

(C) Operations division is toured on Tuesday and that the Production division is toured on Friday

(D) Sales division is toured on Monday and that the Operations division is toured on Friday

(E) Sales division is toured on Wednesday and that the ProductlOn division is toured on Friday

16 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured

on Tuesday is also loured on Friday then for which one of the following days must a tour of the Production division be scheduled

CA) Monday (B ) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

17 If in the week s tour schedule the division that is toured on Monday is not the division that is toured on Tuesday then which one of the following could be true of the week s schedule

(A) A tour of the Sales division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(B) A tour of the Operations division is scheduled for some day earlier in the week than is any tour of the Production division

(C) The Sales division is toured on Monday CD) The Production division is toured on Tuesday (E) The Operations division is toured on Wednesday

18 If in the weeks tour schedule the division that is toured on Tuesday is also toured on Wednesday then which one of the following must be true of the weeks tour schedule

(A) The Production division is toured on Monday (B) The Operations division is toured on Tuesday (C) The Sales division is toured on Wednesday (D) The Sales division is toured on Thursday (E) The Production division is toured on Friday

copy The Prmceton Review Inc I 67

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Each of seven television programs-H J L P Q S V-is a different rank from first seventh (from

most popular to least popular) The ranking is consistent with the conditions

J and L are each less popular than H ] is more popular than Q S and V are each less popular than L P and S are each less popular than Q S is not seventh

19 Which one of the could be the order of the to least popular

(A)] L Q V S P (B) H L Q J S P V (Cl H J Q L S V P (D) H 1 V L Q S P (E) H L V 1 P S

20 If J is more popular than L and S is more popular than P then which one of the following must be true of the

(A) J second (B) 1 is third

L is third Q is third P is seventh

21 Which one of the following programs CANNOT be ranked third

(Al L (B) J (C) Q

V P

22 If V is more than Q and J is less than L then which one of the following could be true of the

(A) P is more popular than S S is more popular than V

(C) P is more popular than L ] is more popular than V

(E) Q more popular than V

23 If Q is more than L then each of the must be true of the ranking EXCEPT

(A) H first (B) L is fOUlth

V is not fourth (D) ] is not third

Q is third

68 copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT2

Qlestions 24-28

Five people-Harry Iri s Kate Nancy and Victor-are to be scheduled as contestants on a television show one contestant per day for five consecutive days from Mond ay through Friday The following restrictions governing the scheduling of contestants must be observed

Nancy is not scheduled for Monday If Harry is scheduled for Monday Nancy is scheduled for

Friday If Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday Iris is scheduled for

Monday Kate is scheduled fo r the next day after the day for which

Victor is scheduled

24 Victor can be scheduled for any day EXCEPT

(A) Monday (B) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

25 If Iris is scheduled for the next day after Harry which one of the following lists all [hose days anyone of which could be the day for which Harry is scheduled

(A) Monday Tuesday (B) Monday Wednesday (C) Monday Thursday (D) Monday Tuesday Wednesday (E) M onday Wednesday Thursday

26 If Kate IS scheduled for Wednesday which one of the following could be true

(A) Iri s is scheduled for Friday (B) Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday (C) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Harry is scheduled (D) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Iris is scheduled (E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Kate is scheduled

27 If Kate is scheduled for Friday which one of the fo llowing mu st be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for Tuesday (B) Harry IS scheduled for Wednesday (C) Iri s is scheduled for Monday (D) Iris is scheduled for Wednesday (E) Nancy is scheduled for Wednesday

28 If Iris is scheduled for Wed nesday which one of the following must be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Nancy is scheduled

(B ) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Kate is scheduled

(C) Kate is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Harry is scheduled

CD) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for whi ch Kate is scheduled

(E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Iris is scheduled

copy The Prin ce ton Re VIew In c I 69

l SAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

20 Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-5

There are exactly ten stores and no other buildings on Oak Street On the north side of the street from west to east are stores 1 3 5 7 and 9 on the south side of the street also from west to east are stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 The stores on the north side are located directly across the street from those on the south side facing each other in pairs as follows 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 Each store is decorated with lights in exactly one of the following colors green red and yellow The stores have been decorated with lights according to the following conditions

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of any store adjacent to it

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of the store directly across the street from it

Yellow lights decorate exactly one store on each side of the street

Red lights decorate store 4 Yellow lights decorate store 5

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the colors of the lights that decorate stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 respectively

(A) green red green red green (B) green red green yellow red (C) green red yellow red green (D) yellow green red green red (E) yellow red green red yellow

2 If green lights decorate store 7 then each of the following statements could be false EXCEPT

(A) Green lights decorate store 2 (8) Green lights decorate store 10 (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Red lights decorate store 9 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 2

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Green lights decorate store 10 (B) Red lights decorate store I (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 8 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 10

4 If green lights decorate five stores on the street then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store 9 (8) Red lights decorate store 2 (C) Red lights decorate store 7 (D) Red lights decorate store lO (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

5 Suppose that yeJlow lights decorate exactly two stores not just one on the south side of the street and decorate exactly one store on the north side If all of the other conditions remain the same then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store l (8) Red lights decorate store 7 (C) Red lights decorate store 10 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 2 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

84 I copy The Princeton Review Jnc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Ouestions 6-10

A school has exactly four dormitories that are to be fully occupied-Richards Tuscarora Veblen and Wisteria-each consisting entirely of a North wing and a South wing The following rules govern assignment of students to dormitory wings

Each wing is assigned only male students or only female students

Exactly three wings have males assigned to them Richards North and Tuscarora Nonh are assigned

females If a dormitory has males assigned to one of its wings

then its other wing is assigned females If males are assigned to Veblen South then Wisteria

North is assigned males

6 If females are assigned to Veblen South and Veblen North then which one of the following could be two other wings that are also assigned females

(A) Richards North and Tuscarora South (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Richards South and Tuscarora North (D) Tuscarora North and Wisteria South (E) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South

7 It CANNOT be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria South (8) Richards South and Tuscarora South (C) Richards South and Veblen North (D) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen North and Wisteria South

8 If Wisteria North is assigned females then females must also be assigned to which one of the following

(A) Richards South (8) Wisteria South (C) Tuscarora South (D) Veblen South (E) Veblen North

9 If males are assigned to Veblen South which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the wings that CANNOT be assigned males

(A) Richards North Tuscarora North (8) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North (C) Richards North Tuscarora North Wisteria South (D) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North

Wisteria South (E) Richards North Richards South Tuscarora North

Veblen North Wisteria South

10 If Tuscarora South is assigned females then it could be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria North (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Veblen North and Wisteria North (D) Veblen South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen South and Veblen North

86 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 11: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Each of seven television programs-H J L P Q S V-is a different rank from first seventh (from

most popular to least popular) The ranking is consistent with the conditions

J and L are each less popular than H ] is more popular than Q S and V are each less popular than L P and S are each less popular than Q S is not seventh

19 Which one of the could be the order of the to least popular

(A)] L Q V S P (B) H L Q J S P V (Cl H J Q L S V P (D) H 1 V L Q S P (E) H L V 1 P S

20 If J is more popular than L and S is more popular than P then which one of the following must be true of the

(A) J second (B) 1 is third

L is third Q is third P is seventh

21 Which one of the following programs CANNOT be ranked third

(Al L (B) J (C) Q

V P

22 If V is more than Q and J is less than L then which one of the following could be true of the

(A) P is more popular than S S is more popular than V

(C) P is more popular than L ] is more popular than V

(E) Q more popular than V

23 If Q is more than L then each of the must be true of the ranking EXCEPT

(A) H first (B) L is fOUlth

V is not fourth (D) ] is not third

Q is third

68 copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT2

Qlestions 24-28

Five people-Harry Iri s Kate Nancy and Victor-are to be scheduled as contestants on a television show one contestant per day for five consecutive days from Mond ay through Friday The following restrictions governing the scheduling of contestants must be observed

Nancy is not scheduled for Monday If Harry is scheduled for Monday Nancy is scheduled for

Friday If Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday Iris is scheduled for

Monday Kate is scheduled fo r the next day after the day for which

Victor is scheduled

24 Victor can be scheduled for any day EXCEPT

(A) Monday (B) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

25 If Iris is scheduled for the next day after Harry which one of the following lists all [hose days anyone of which could be the day for which Harry is scheduled

(A) Monday Tuesday (B) Monday Wednesday (C) Monday Thursday (D) Monday Tuesday Wednesday (E) M onday Wednesday Thursday

26 If Kate IS scheduled for Wednesday which one of the following could be true

(A) Iri s is scheduled for Friday (B) Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday (C) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Harry is scheduled (D) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Iris is scheduled (E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Kate is scheduled

27 If Kate is scheduled for Friday which one of the fo llowing mu st be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for Tuesday (B) Harry IS scheduled for Wednesday (C) Iri s is scheduled for Monday (D) Iris is scheduled for Wednesday (E) Nancy is scheduled for Wednesday

28 If Iris is scheduled for Wed nesday which one of the following must be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Nancy is scheduled

(B ) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Kate is scheduled

(C) Kate is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Harry is scheduled

CD) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for whi ch Kate is scheduled

(E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Iris is scheduled

copy The Prin ce ton Re VIew In c I 69

l SAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

20 Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-5

There are exactly ten stores and no other buildings on Oak Street On the north side of the street from west to east are stores 1 3 5 7 and 9 on the south side of the street also from west to east are stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 The stores on the north side are located directly across the street from those on the south side facing each other in pairs as follows 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 Each store is decorated with lights in exactly one of the following colors green red and yellow The stores have been decorated with lights according to the following conditions

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of any store adjacent to it

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of the store directly across the street from it

Yellow lights decorate exactly one store on each side of the street

Red lights decorate store 4 Yellow lights decorate store 5

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the colors of the lights that decorate stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 respectively

(A) green red green red green (B) green red green yellow red (C) green red yellow red green (D) yellow green red green red (E) yellow red green red yellow

2 If green lights decorate store 7 then each of the following statements could be false EXCEPT

(A) Green lights decorate store 2 (8) Green lights decorate store 10 (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Red lights decorate store 9 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 2

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Green lights decorate store 10 (B) Red lights decorate store I (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 8 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 10

4 If green lights decorate five stores on the street then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store 9 (8) Red lights decorate store 2 (C) Red lights decorate store 7 (D) Red lights decorate store lO (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

5 Suppose that yeJlow lights decorate exactly two stores not just one on the south side of the street and decorate exactly one store on the north side If all of the other conditions remain the same then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store l (8) Red lights decorate store 7 (C) Red lights decorate store 10 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 2 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

84 I copy The Princeton Review Jnc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Ouestions 6-10

A school has exactly four dormitories that are to be fully occupied-Richards Tuscarora Veblen and Wisteria-each consisting entirely of a North wing and a South wing The following rules govern assignment of students to dormitory wings

Each wing is assigned only male students or only female students

Exactly three wings have males assigned to them Richards North and Tuscarora Nonh are assigned

females If a dormitory has males assigned to one of its wings

then its other wing is assigned females If males are assigned to Veblen South then Wisteria

North is assigned males

6 If females are assigned to Veblen South and Veblen North then which one of the following could be two other wings that are also assigned females

(A) Richards North and Tuscarora South (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Richards South and Tuscarora North (D) Tuscarora North and Wisteria South (E) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South

7 It CANNOT be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria South (8) Richards South and Tuscarora South (C) Richards South and Veblen North (D) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen North and Wisteria South

8 If Wisteria North is assigned females then females must also be assigned to which one of the following

(A) Richards South (8) Wisteria South (C) Tuscarora South (D) Veblen South (E) Veblen North

9 If males are assigned to Veblen South which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the wings that CANNOT be assigned males

(A) Richards North Tuscarora North (8) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North (C) Richards North Tuscarora North Wisteria South (D) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North

Wisteria South (E) Richards North Richards South Tuscarora North

Veblen North Wisteria South

10 If Tuscarora South is assigned females then it could be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria North (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Veblen North and Wisteria North (D) Veblen South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen South and Veblen North

86 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 12: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT2

Qlestions 24-28

Five people-Harry Iri s Kate Nancy and Victor-are to be scheduled as contestants on a television show one contestant per day for five consecutive days from Mond ay through Friday The following restrictions governing the scheduling of contestants must be observed

Nancy is not scheduled for Monday If Harry is scheduled for Monday Nancy is scheduled for

Friday If Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday Iris is scheduled for

Monday Kate is scheduled fo r the next day after the day for which

Victor is scheduled

24 Victor can be scheduled for any day EXCEPT

(A) Monday (B) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Thursday (E) Friday

25 If Iris is scheduled for the next day after Harry which one of the following lists all [hose days anyone of which could be the day for which Harry is scheduled

(A) Monday Tuesday (B) Monday Wednesday (C) Monday Thursday (D) Monday Tuesday Wednesday (E) M onday Wednesday Thursday

26 If Kate IS scheduled for Wednesday which one of the following could be true

(A) Iri s is scheduled for Friday (B) Nancy is scheduled for Tuesday (C) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Harry is scheduled (D) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Iris is scheduled (E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day

for which Kate is scheduled

27 If Kate is scheduled for Friday which one of the fo llowing mu st be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for Tuesday (B) Harry IS scheduled for Wednesday (C) Iri s is scheduled for Monday (D) Iris is scheduled for Wednesday (E) Nancy is scheduled for Wednesday

28 If Iris is scheduled for Wed nesday which one of the following must be true

(A) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Nancy is scheduled

(B ) Harry is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Kate is scheduled

(C) Kate is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Harry is scheduled

CD) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for whi ch Kate is scheduled

(E) Nancy is scheduled for an earlier day than the day for which Iris is scheduled

copy The Prin ce ton Re VIew In c I 69

l SAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

20 Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-5

There are exactly ten stores and no other buildings on Oak Street On the north side of the street from west to east are stores 1 3 5 7 and 9 on the south side of the street also from west to east are stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 The stores on the north side are located directly across the street from those on the south side facing each other in pairs as follows 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 Each store is decorated with lights in exactly one of the following colors green red and yellow The stores have been decorated with lights according to the following conditions

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of any store adjacent to it

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of the store directly across the street from it

Yellow lights decorate exactly one store on each side of the street

Red lights decorate store 4 Yellow lights decorate store 5

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the colors of the lights that decorate stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 respectively

(A) green red green red green (B) green red green yellow red (C) green red yellow red green (D) yellow green red green red (E) yellow red green red yellow

2 If green lights decorate store 7 then each of the following statements could be false EXCEPT

(A) Green lights decorate store 2 (8) Green lights decorate store 10 (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Red lights decorate store 9 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 2

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Green lights decorate store 10 (B) Red lights decorate store I (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 8 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 10

4 If green lights decorate five stores on the street then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store 9 (8) Red lights decorate store 2 (C) Red lights decorate store 7 (D) Red lights decorate store lO (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

5 Suppose that yeJlow lights decorate exactly two stores not just one on the south side of the street and decorate exactly one store on the north side If all of the other conditions remain the same then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store l (8) Red lights decorate store 7 (C) Red lights decorate store 10 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 2 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

84 I copy The Princeton Review Jnc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Ouestions 6-10

A school has exactly four dormitories that are to be fully occupied-Richards Tuscarora Veblen and Wisteria-each consisting entirely of a North wing and a South wing The following rules govern assignment of students to dormitory wings

Each wing is assigned only male students or only female students

Exactly three wings have males assigned to them Richards North and Tuscarora Nonh are assigned

females If a dormitory has males assigned to one of its wings

then its other wing is assigned females If males are assigned to Veblen South then Wisteria

North is assigned males

6 If females are assigned to Veblen South and Veblen North then which one of the following could be two other wings that are also assigned females

(A) Richards North and Tuscarora South (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Richards South and Tuscarora North (D) Tuscarora North and Wisteria South (E) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South

7 It CANNOT be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria South (8) Richards South and Tuscarora South (C) Richards South and Veblen North (D) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen North and Wisteria South

8 If Wisteria North is assigned females then females must also be assigned to which one of the following

(A) Richards South (8) Wisteria South (C) Tuscarora South (D) Veblen South (E) Veblen North

9 If males are assigned to Veblen South which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the wings that CANNOT be assigned males

(A) Richards North Tuscarora North (8) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North (C) Richards North Tuscarora North Wisteria South (D) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North

Wisteria South (E) Richards North Richards South Tuscarora North

Veblen North Wisteria South

10 If Tuscarora South is assigned females then it could be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria North (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Veblen North and Wisteria North (D) Veblen South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen South and Veblen North

86 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 13: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

l SAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

20 Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-5

There are exactly ten stores and no other buildings on Oak Street On the north side of the street from west to east are stores 1 3 5 7 and 9 on the south side of the street also from west to east are stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 The stores on the north side are located directly across the street from those on the south side facing each other in pairs as follows 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10 Each store is decorated with lights in exactly one of the following colors green red and yellow The stores have been decorated with lights according to the following conditions

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of any store adjacent to it

No store is decorated with lights of the same color as those of the store directly across the street from it

Yellow lights decorate exactly one store on each side of the street

Red lights decorate store 4 Yellow lights decorate store 5

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the colors of the lights that decorate stores 2 4 6 8 and 10 respectively

(A) green red green red green (B) green red green yellow red (C) green red yellow red green (D) yellow green red green red (E) yellow red green red yellow

2 If green lights decorate store 7 then each of the following statements could be false EXCEPT

(A) Green lights decorate store 2 (8) Green lights decorate store 10 (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Red lights decorate store 9 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 2

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Green lights decorate store 10 (B) Red lights decorate store I (C) Red lights decorate store 8 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 8 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 10

4 If green lights decorate five stores on the street then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store 9 (8) Red lights decorate store 2 (C) Red lights decorate store 7 (D) Red lights decorate store lO (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

5 Suppose that yeJlow lights decorate exactly two stores not just one on the south side of the street and decorate exactly one store on the north side If all of the other conditions remain the same then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Green lights decorate store l (8) Red lights decorate store 7 (C) Red lights decorate store 10 (D) Yellow lights decorate store 2 (E) Yellow lights decorate store 8

84 I copy The Princeton Review Jnc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Ouestions 6-10

A school has exactly four dormitories that are to be fully occupied-Richards Tuscarora Veblen and Wisteria-each consisting entirely of a North wing and a South wing The following rules govern assignment of students to dormitory wings

Each wing is assigned only male students or only female students

Exactly three wings have males assigned to them Richards North and Tuscarora Nonh are assigned

females If a dormitory has males assigned to one of its wings

then its other wing is assigned females If males are assigned to Veblen South then Wisteria

North is assigned males

6 If females are assigned to Veblen South and Veblen North then which one of the following could be two other wings that are also assigned females

(A) Richards North and Tuscarora South (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Richards South and Tuscarora North (D) Tuscarora North and Wisteria South (E) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South

7 It CANNOT be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria South (8) Richards South and Tuscarora South (C) Richards South and Veblen North (D) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen North and Wisteria South

8 If Wisteria North is assigned females then females must also be assigned to which one of the following

(A) Richards South (8) Wisteria South (C) Tuscarora South (D) Veblen South (E) Veblen North

9 If males are assigned to Veblen South which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the wings that CANNOT be assigned males

(A) Richards North Tuscarora North (8) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North (C) Richards North Tuscarora North Wisteria South (D) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North

Wisteria South (E) Richards North Richards South Tuscarora North

Veblen North Wisteria South

10 If Tuscarora South is assigned females then it could be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria North (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Veblen North and Wisteria North (D) Veblen South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen South and Veblen North

86 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 14: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Ouestions 6-10

A school has exactly four dormitories that are to be fully occupied-Richards Tuscarora Veblen and Wisteria-each consisting entirely of a North wing and a South wing The following rules govern assignment of students to dormitory wings

Each wing is assigned only male students or only female students

Exactly three wings have males assigned to them Richards North and Tuscarora Nonh are assigned

females If a dormitory has males assigned to one of its wings

then its other wing is assigned females If males are assigned to Veblen South then Wisteria

North is assigned males

6 If females are assigned to Veblen South and Veblen North then which one of the following could be two other wings that are also assigned females

(A) Richards North and Tuscarora South (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Richards South and Tuscarora North (D) Tuscarora North and Wisteria South (E) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South

7 It CANNOT be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria South (8) Richards South and Tuscarora South (C) Richards South and Veblen North (D) Tuscarora South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen North and Wisteria South

8 If Wisteria North is assigned females then females must also be assigned to which one of the following

(A) Richards South (8) Wisteria South (C) Tuscarora South (D) Veblen South (E) Veblen North

9 If males are assigned to Veblen South which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the wings that CANNOT be assigned males

(A) Richards North Tuscarora North (8) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North (C) Richards North Tuscarora North Wisteria South (D) Richards North Tuscarora North Veblen North

Wisteria South (E) Richards North Richards South Tuscarora North

Veblen North Wisteria South

10 If Tuscarora South is assigned females then it could be true that females are assigned to both

(A) Richards South and Wisteria North (8) Richards South and Wisteria South (C) Veblen North and Wisteria North (D) Veblen South and Wisteria South (E) Veblen South and Veblen North

86 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 15: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

2D Games Spatial Arrangements Questions 1-6

Six c ities are located within the numbered areas as follows

City

l

City

3

City S

City

2

City 4

City 6

Within the six-city area there are exactly four hos pitals two jails and two universities These eight institutions are located as follows

No institution is in more than one of the cities None of the cities contains more than one jail and none

contains more than one university None of the cities contains both a jail and a uni versity

Each jail is located in a city that contains at least one hospital

The universities are located in two cities that do not share a common boundary

City 3 contains a university and city 6 contains a jail

1 Which one of the following could be true

(A) City S contains a university (B) City 6 contains a uni versity (C) City 2 contains a jail (D) City 3 contains a Jail (E) City 3 contains a hospital

2 Which one of the following could be true

(A ) City l contains exactly one hospital (B) City I contains exactly one university (C) City 2 contains exactly one jail (D) City S contains exac tly one universit y (E) City 6 contains exactly one university

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list o f the cities anyone of which could contain the jail that is not in city 6

(A) 1 4 (B) 2 4 (C) 4 S (D) 1 4 S (E) I 2 4 S

4 If each of the six cities contains at leas t one of the eight institutions then which one of the following mu st be true

(A) There is a jail in city l (B) There is a hospital in city 2 (C) There is a hospital in city 3 (D) There is a hospital in city 4 (E) There is a jail in city 4

S In which one of the following cities must there be fewer than three hospital s

(A ) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) S (E) 6

6 If one of the cities contains exactly two hospitals and exactly one university then which one of the following lists three cities that might among them contain no hospital

(A) I 3 S (B) I 4 S (C)2 3 S (D) 2 46 (E) 4 S 6

100 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 16: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT3

QyestioJls 7-12

On an undeveloped stree t a developer will simultaneou sly build four houses on one side numbered consecutively I 3 5 and 7 and four houses on the opposite side numbered consecutively 2 4 6 and 8 Houses 2 4 6 and 8 will face houses 1 3 5 and 7 respectively Each house will be exaclly one of three styles-ranch split-leveL or Tudor-according to the following conditions

Adjacent houses are of different styles No split-level house faces another split level hou se Every ranch ho use has at leas t one Tudor house adjacent

to it House 3 is a ranch house House 6 is a split-level house

7 Any of the following could be a TUdor house EXCEPT house

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 7 (E) 8

8 If there is one ranch house di rectly opposite another ranch house which one of the following could be true

(A) House 8 is a ranch house (B) House 7 is a split-level house (C) House 4 is a Tudor house (D) House 2 is a split-level house (E) House 1 is a ranch hou se

9 If house 4 is a Tudor house thell it could be true that house

(A) 1 is a Tudor house (B) 2 is a Tudor house (C) 5 is a ranch house (D) 7 is a Tudor house (E) 8 is a ranch house

10 On the street there could be exactly

(A) one ranch house (B) one Tudor house (C) two Tudor houses (D) four ranch houses (E) fi ve ranch houses

11 If no hou se faces a house of the same style then it must be true that hou se

(A) 1 is a split-level house (B) 1 is a Tudor house (C) 2 is a ranch house (D) 2 is a split-level house (E) 4 is a Tudor house

12 If the condition requiring house 6 to be a split level house is suspended but all other original conditions remain the same then any of the following could be an accurate li st of the styles of hou ses 2 4 6 and 8 respectively EXCEPT

(A) ranch split-level ranch Tudor (B ) split-level ranch Tudor split-level (C) split-level Tudor ranch split-level (D) Tudor ranch Tudor split-level (E) Tudor split-level ranch Tudor

copy The Prin ce ton Review Inc 101

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 17: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Four lions-F G J-and two and M-will be six stalls one animal per stall The stalls

as follows First Row 1 2 3

Second Row 4 5 6 The stalls that face each other are stalls 1 and 4 stalls 2 and 5 and stalls 3 and 6 The following conditions

The tigers stalls cannot face each other A lion must be to stall J H must be assigned to stall 6 J must be assigned to a stall numbered one higher than

Ks stall K cannot be assigned to the stall that faces Hs stall

13 Which one of the following must be true

(A) F is to an even-numbered stalL F is assigned to stall 1 J is assigned to stall 2 or else stall

CD) J is to stall 3 or else stall 4 (El K is assigned to stall 2 or else stall 4

14 Which one of the following could be true

Fs stall is numbered one than 1s stall Hs stall faces Ms stall J is assigned to stall 4

(D) Ks stall faces 15 stall (E) Ks stall is in a different row than 1s stall

IS Which one of the must be true

A tiger is 10 stall 2 A is to stall 5

(C) Ks stall is in a different row from Ms stall (D) Each is assigned to an even-numbered stall (E) Each lion is assigned to a stall that faces a

stalL

16 If Ks stall is in the same row as Hs stall which one of the following must be true

(A) Fs stall is in the same row as 1s stalL (B) F is 10 a lower-numbered stall than G

G is to a lower-numbered stall than M Gs stall faces Hs stall

(E) Ms stall is in the same row as Gs stall

17 If J is to stall 3 which one of the following could be true)

F is to stall 2 (B) F is assigned to stall 4

G is assIgned to stall I G is to stall 4

(E) M assmed to stall 5

IS vVhich one of the following must be true

A tiger is to stall 2 (B) A tiger is to stall 4

A is assigned to stall 5 (D) A lion is assigned to stall 3 (E) A lion is assigned to stall 4

102 I copy Th Prinewn Review Inc

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 18: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

-

UNlT 4

2D Games Combining Order and Groups

Of the five Pohl children-Sara Thea Uma Will and are left-handed and two right-handed Each of

the five children was born in a different one of seven calendar 1990 1996 The following conditions

No two left-handed children were born in consecuti ve years

No two children were born in consecutive years

Sara who is left-handed was born before Uma Zoe was born before both Thea and Wi L A left-handed child was born in 1991 Uma who is right-handed was born in 1991

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of each Pohl child with the year in which that child was born

(A) Sara 1990 Zoe 1992 Uma 1993 Will 1994 and Thea 1995

(B) Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 Zoe 1995 and Will 1996

Zoe Sara 1991 Uma 1992 Thea 1994 and Will 1995

(D) Zoe 1990 Sara 199] Uma 1993 Theo 1994 and Will 1995

(E) Zoe 1990 Sara 1991 Uma 1993 Thea 1994 and Will 1996

2 If Sara was born before Zoe was born then which one of the following statements CANNOT be true

(A) Will is left-handed (B) Zoe is left-handed (e) Thea was born after Will was born (D) Uma was born after Zoe was born

No child was born in 1990

3 Which one of the following must be false

(A) None of the children was born in 1990 nor was a child born in 1992

None of the children was born in 1992 nor was a child born in 1995

None of the children was born in 1994 nor was a child born in 1996

One of the children was born in 1990 and another in 1993

(E) One of the children was born in 1993 and another in 1995

4 If Thea was born after Will was born then how many of the children from firstborn to

CA) one (B) two (e) three CD) four

five

5 If none of the children was born in 1995 then which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Thea was born in 1994 Will was born in 1994

(e) Will was born in 1996 CD) Zoe was born in 1990

Zoe was bom in 1994

6 If Theo is right-handed then each of the following statements must be false EXCEPT

(A) Thea was born in 1996 Will was born in 1995

(C) Uma was born three years before Thea was born

(D) Zoe was born exactly one year before Thea was born

Will is

7 If Zoe was born before Uma was born then which one of the following statements must be false

(A) No child was born in 1992 No child was born in 1995

eel Theo is left-handed Zoe is left-handed Will is left-handed

copy The Princetorl Review 121

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 19: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

--shy

Questions 8-12

Maggies Deli is open exactly five days every week Monday through Friday Its staff each of whom works on at least one day each week consists of exactly six people-Janice Kevin Nan Ophelia Paul and Seymour Exactly three of themshyJanice Nan and Paul-are supervisors The delis staffing is consistent with the following

Each day s staff consists of exactly two people at least one of whom is a supervisor

Tuesdays and Wednesdays staffs both include Ophelia Of the days Nan works each week at least two are consecutive

Seymour does not work on any day before the first day Paul works that week

Any day on which Kevin works is the first day during the week that some other staff member works

8 Which one of the following could be an accurate staffing schedule

(A) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Paul Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Janice Seymour

(B) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Nan Friday Janice Seymour

(C) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Nan Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Kevin Paul Friday Paul Seymour

(D) Monday Janice Kevin Tuesday Janice Ophelia Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Nan Seymour Friday Kevin Paul

(E) Monday Paul Seymour Tuesday Ophelia Paul Wednesday Nan Ophelia Thursday Janice Kevin Friday Nan Paul

UNIT 4

9 If Kevin and Paul work Thursday who must work Friday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice Kevin Nan Paul Seymour

to Each of the following could be true EXCEPT

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice works Monday and Tuesday Kevin and Paul work Friday Seymour works Monday and Friday Janice and Kevin work Thursday Paul works Monday and Friday

It Which one of the following CANNOT be the pair of staff that works Monday

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Janice and Seymour Kevin and Paul Paul and Seymour Nan and Ophelia Janice and Nan

12 Which one of the following could be true)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

(E)

Nan works Wednesday and Friday only Seymour works Monday and Paul works Tuesday Kevin works Monday Wednesday and Friday Nan works Wednesday with Ophelia and Thursday with Kevin

Ophelia and Kevin work Tuesday

copy The Princeton Re lew Inc I 123

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 20: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

---

LSAT 101 CORECONCEPTS

2D Games Combining Order and Groups Ouestions 1-6

Four boys-Fred Juan Marc and Paul-and three girlsshyNita Rachel and Trisha-will be assigned to a row of five adjacent lockers numbered consecutively 1 through 5 arranged along a straight wall The folowing conditions govern the assignment of lockers to the seven children

Each locker must be assigned to either one or two children and each child must be ass igned to exactly one locker

Each shared locker must be assigned to one girl and one boy

Juan must share a locker but Rachel cannot share a locker

Nitas locker cannot be adjacent to Trishas locker Fred must be assigned to locker 3

l Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the children who must be among those assigned to shared lockers

(A) Fred Juan (B) Juan Paul (C) Juan Marc Paul (D) Juan Marc Trisha (E) Juan Nita Trisha

2 If Trisha is assigned to locker 3 and Marc alone is assigned to locker 1 then which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locker 4 (B) Juan is assigned to locker 5 (C) Paul is assigned to locker 2 (D) Rachel is assigned to locker 2 (E) Rachel is assigned to locker 5

3 If the four boys are assigned to consecutively numbered lockers and Juan is assigned to locker 5 then which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of lockers each of which CANNOT be a shared locker

(A) locker 2 (B) locker 4

(C) locker 1 locker 2 (D) locker 1 locker 4 (E) locker 2 locker 4

4 Once Rachel has been assigned [0 a locker what is the maximum number of different lockers each of which middot could be the locker to which Juan is ass igned

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

5 If the first three lockers are assigned to girls which one of the following must be true

(A) Juan is assigned to locke r l (B) Nita is assigned to locker 3 (C) Trisha is assigned to locker 1 (D) Juan is assigned to the same locker as Trisha (E) Paul is assigned to the same locker as Trisha

6 If lockers 1 and 2 are each assigned to one boy and are not shared lockers then locker 4 must be assigned to

(A) Juan (B) Paul (C) Rachel (D) Juan and Nita (E) Marc and Trisha

132 I copy The Princeton Re vlew lnc

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 21: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT 11

10 Which one of the must be true

At a small press six textbooks three G and three advanced-X Y and Z-will each be evaluated

once by the editor Juarel and once the six consecutive weeks-week 1

week 6 Each evaluator evaluates one textbook per week No textbook will be evaluated Juarez and

the same week The following additional constraints

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any textbook until Juarez has evaluated that textbook

Juarez eannot evaluate any advanced textbook until has evaluated that textbook

Rosenberg cannot evaluate any two introductory textbooks

Juarez must evaluate X week 4

Which one of the is an evaluation schedule with the textbooks listed in order of evaluation from week 1 through week 6

(A) Juarez F G X Z H Y X F Z Y H

Juarez F Y X H Z Y F X G Z H

(e) Juarez G H F X Y Z X G R Y Z F

(D) Juarez G Z F X H Y Z F X G Y H

Juarez H Y F X G Z Rosenberg X R Z F Y G

8 If Juarez evaluates H week 3 and evaluates G must be true

(Al Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates G (e) Juarez evaluates Z (D) evaluates X week 1 (E) Rosenberg evaluates Y during week 5

9 If Juarez evaluates Z week 2 then must evaluate which one of the followil1i1 textbooks during week 5

(A) F (B) H

X (D) Y

Z

(A) evaluates H week 6 evaluates an advanced textbook during

(e) Juarez evaluates an advanced textbook during week 2

(D) Juarez evaluates Y before G Juarez does no evaluate any two introductory textbooks

J1 If evaluates X week 1 and F week 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) X is the third of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(E) Y is the first of the advanced textbooks to be evaluated Juarez

(e) Juarez does not evaluate any two introductory textbooks in a row

(D) Juarez evaluates G during week 5 (E) Juarez evaluates Z during week 6

12 Which one of the is a and accurate list of those weeks which Juarez must evaluate an introductory textbook

(A) week 1 (E) week 6

week 1 week 5 (D) week L week week 3 (E) week 1 week 3 week 5

13 Whieh one of the following could be true

(A) Juarez evaluates F (B) Juarez evaluates Z (e) evaluates F week 3 (D) evaluates H during week 2

evaluates X durinpound week S

co The Princeton Review lJ)c 1133

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 22: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

tSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

16 If lithography and history are scheduled for the of day 2 and day 3 which one

An art teacher will schedule exactly six of eight lectures- of the following lectures could be scheduled for the lithography naturalism oils sculpture morning of day I

and watercolors-for three 2 and 3 There will be two lectures each day-morning and afternoon Scheduling is by the following conditions

2 is the only day for which oils can be scheduled Neither sculpture nor watercolors can be scheduled for the afternoon

Neither oils nor can be scheduled for the same as

If pastels is scheduled for I or day 2 then the lectures scheduled for the immediately following

must be fresco and history not necessarilv in that order

14 Which one of the is an acceptable schedule of lectures for days I 2 and 3 respectively

(A) Morning lithography sculpture Afternoon pastels fresco naturalism

(B) Morning naturalism oils fresco Afternoon lithography pastels history

(C) Morning oils history naturalism Afternoon fresco lithography

(D) sculpture lithography naturalism Afternoon watercolors fresco Morning fresco Afternoon lithography hisOrv naturalism

15 If and fresco are scheduled for the afternoons of day 2 and day 3 which one of the following is a lecture that could be scheduled for the afternoon of day 1)

(A) history (B) oils (C) (D) (E) watercolors

(A) fresco naturalism oils

(D) (E)

17 If oils and lithography are scheduled for the of day 2 and 3 which one of the following CANNOT be scheduled for any day

(A) fresco (B) history (C) naturalism (D) pastels

sculpture

18 If neither fresco nor naturalism is scheduled for any day which one of the following must be scheduled for day I

(B) lithography oils

(D) pastels (E) sculpture

19 If the lectures scheduled for the are fresco history and not in that order which one of the following could be true)

(A) is scheduled for day 3 (B) Naturalism is scheduled for day 2 (C) Fresco is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism (D) is scheduled for the same day as

naturalism History is scheduled for the same day as oils

134 I copyThe Review Inc

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 23: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT 4 -

Qilestions 20-25 23 Which one of the following statements could be true

During each of the fall winter spring and summer seasons (A) Nikkis fall sport is neither mountaineering nor of one year Nikki and Otto each participate in exactly one of running the following five sports hockey kayaking mountaineering (B) Nikkis spring sport is neither mountaineering nor running and volleyball running

Each child participates in exactly four different sports (C) Nikkis summer sport is neither kayaking nor during the year mountaineering

In the fall each child participates in mountaineering (D) Ottos fall sport is neither mountaineering nor

running or volleyball running In the winter each child participates in hockey or (E) Ottos spring sport is neither kayaking nor

volleyball mountaineering nor running In the spring each child participates in kayaking

mountaineering running or volleyball 24 If Otto does not run during the year then which one of In the summer each child participates in kayaking the following statements must be false

mountaineering or volleyball (A) Nikki s fall sport is runningNikki and Otto do not participate in the same sport (B) Nikkis spring sport is running during the same season (C) Nikkis summer sport is kayakingOttos summer sport is volleyball (D) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking

20 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) Nikki s fall sport is running 25 Which one of the following statements could be true (B) Nikkis winter sport is volleyball

(A) Nikki s fall sport is mountaineering and Ottos(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering spring sport is running (D) Otto s fall sport is mountaineering

(B) Nikkis spring sport is running and her summer(E) Ottos spring sport is kayaking sport is mountaineering

(C) Nikkis spring sport is mountaineering and Ottos 21 It CANNOT be true that both Nikki and Otto participate fall sport is mountaineering

during the year in which one of the following sports) (D) Nikkis spring sport is running and Ottos fall (A) hockey sport is mountaineering (B) kayaking (E) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering and (C) mountaineering Ottos spring sport is mountaineering (D) running (E) volleyball

22 If Nikki s fall sport is running then which one of the following statements must be true)

(A) Nikki s spring sport is kayaking (B) Nikkis summer sport is mountaineering (C) Ottos fall sport is mountaineering (D) Ottos spring sport is kayaking (E) Otto s spring sport is running

copy The Princeton RevieW lnc l ll5

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 24: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

More Games Mixed Bag

An official is five Ned Olivia Patricia and parallel lanes numbered I through 5 The official will also each runner to represent a different charity-F G H J and K-not

in order of the runners names as given The

restrictions apply K is to lane 4

to the only lane between the lanes of F and G

two lanes between Olivias lane and the lane of the runner G

is assigned to a higher numbered lane than the lane to which Ned is

1 Which one of the following is a assif1nment of runners to lanes the charity they

1 2 2 1 5 F G H K J

(8) G H J K F G K F J H

(D) H J G K F (E) J H F K G

2 The lane to which Patricia is must be a lane that is

next to the lane to which Larry is (B) next to the lane to which Ned is

separated by exactly one lane from the lane to which Ned is

(D) by which Olivia is

(E) separated by which

3 If Olivia is to lane 2 which one of the following must be made)

Lane (A) F I (B) G 5

H 1 H 3

(E) J 5

4 Which one of the is a and accurate list of runners each of whom could be the runner

F

(A) Larry Ned (B) Patricia Sonja

Ned Olivia (D) Ned Sonja

Ned Patricia

5 If Ned is the runner J then it must be true that

lA) the runner to lane 1 the runner to lane 2

is the runner representing K (D) Olivia is the nmner F

Patricia is the runner H

6 If Larrv represents J which one of the following could of runners to lanes

1 Z 2 1 5 (A) Larry Olivia Ned Patricia Sonja

(B) Larry Ned Olivia Patricia

(e) Patricia Ned Olivia

(D) Ned Olivia Patricia Sonja

(E) Ned Olivia Patricia Larry

140 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 25: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT 4

Questions 7-12

A professor wi ll listen to exactly one speech from each of six studeJ1ls-H J K R S and T The six speeches wi ll be deli vered one at a time consecutively accordi ng to the fo llow ing conditions

T he speeches deli vered by H J and K no m atter what their order relative to eac h other can not form a sequence of three consecutive speeches

T he speeches deli vered by R S and T no matter what their order relati ve to each o ther can not fo rm a sequence of three consecuti ve speeches

H s speech must be ea rl ier than S s speech 1s speech can be neither fi rst nor sixth Ts speech ca n be neither immediately before nor

immediately after 1s speech

7 Which one of the following could be the order from first to last in which the students deliver their speeches

(A) H J R S T K (B) H R T K S J (C) K J T H S R (D) R J K T H 5 (E) T R J 5 K H

8 If T delivers the third speech which one of the fo llowin g must be true

(A) H delivers the firs t speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fo urth speech (D) R delivers the sixth speech (E) S delivers the fourth speech

9 If S de livers the thi rd speech and T delivers the fourth speech then which one of the fo llow ing must be true

(A) H delivers the second speech (B) J delivers the fifth speech (C) K delivers the fi fth speech (D) K delivers the fi rs t speech (E) R delivers the fi rst speech

10 If K delivers the fi rst speech and H delivers the fi fth speec h whic h one of the follow in g must be true

(A) R delivers the third speech (B) T deli vers the fourth speech (C) 1s speech is im med iately be fore H s speech (D) K s speech is immediately before Ts speech (E) R s speech is immediately before 1s speech

11 If R s speech is immediate ly after 5s speech and immedia tely before Ks speec h then which one of the fo llowing could be true

(A) H s speech is immediately before 5 s speech (B) H s speec h is immediately before T s speech (C) Ks speech is immediately be fore 1s speech (D) K s speech is immediate ly before Ts speech (E) Ts speech is immediately before Ss speech

12 If K deli vers the tbird speech any of the following could be the student who makes the fourth speech EXCEPT

(A) H (B) J (C) R (D) 5 (E) T

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 141

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 26: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 13-19

A college offers one course in each of three subjectsshymathematics nutrition and oceanography-in the fall and again in the spring Students book orders for these course offerings are kept in six folders numbered 1 through 6 from which labels identifying the folders contents are missing The following is known

Each folder contains only the orders for one of the six course offerings

Folder 1 contains orders for the same subject as folder 2 does

The orders in folder 3 are for a different subject than are the orders in folder 4

The fall mathematics orders are in folder I or else folder 4

The spring oceanography orders are in folder I Or else folder 4

The spring nutrition orders are not in folder 5

13 Which one of the following could be the list of the contents of the folders in order from folder I to folder 6

(A) fall mathematics spring mathematics fall oceanography fall nutrition spring nutrition spring oceanography

(8) fall oceanography spring nutrition fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring oceanography

(C) spring mathematics fall mathematics spring nutrition fall oceanography fall nutrition spring oceanography

(D) spring oceanography fall oceanography fall nutrition fall mathematics spring mathematics spring nutrition

(E) spring oceanography fall oceanography spring mathematics fall mathematics fall nutrition spring nutrition

14 Which one of the following statements must be false

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 3 (8) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 3 (C) The spring oceanography orders are in folder 1 (D) The spring nutrition orders are in folder 6 (E) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 5

15 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then which one of the following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 4 (8) The spring mathematics orders are in folder 6 (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder I (D) The spring nutrition orders are in neither folder 3

nor folder 6 (E) Neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are

in folder 3

16 Which one of [he following statements could be true

(A) The spring mathematics orders are in folder I (B) The fall oceanography orders are in folder I (C) The fall nutrition orders are in folder 4 and the

fall oceanography orders are in folder 6 (D) The fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 and

the spring oceanography orders are in folder I (E) The spring oceanography orders are in folder I

and neither the spring nor the fall nutrition orders are in folder 3

17 If the fall oceanography orders are in folder 2 then for exactly how many of the remaining five folders can it be deduced which course offerings orders are in that folder

(A) one (B) two (C) three (D) four (E) five

18 Which one of the following lists a pair of folders that must together contain orders for two different subjects

(A) 3 and 5 (B) 4 and 5 (C) 3 and 6 (D) 4 and 6 (E) 5 and 6

19 Which one of the following could be true

(A) The fall mathematics and spririg oceanography orders are in folders with consecutive numbers

(8) Folder 5 contains the orders for a spring course in a subject other than mathematics

(C) Folder 6 contains the orders for a subject other than nutrition

(D) The mathematics orders are in folders I and 4 (E) The orders for the fall courses are in folders I 3

and 6

142 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

-

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 27: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT 4

QJJestions 20 24

In a theater company four two-day workshops-Lighting Production Rehearsals and Staging-are conducted over the course of five days Monday through Friday The workshops are conducted in a manner consistent with the following constraints

The two days on which a given workshop is in session are consecutive

On each of the five days at least one but no more than two of the workshops are in session

The workshops on Production and Rehearsals begin no earlier than the day immediately following the second day of the workshop on Lighting

20 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) Only one workshop is in session on Thursday (8) Only one workshop is in session on Friday (C) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on

Tuesday (0) The workshop on Staging is in session on

Thursday (E) The workshops in Rehearsals and Production are

both in session on Wednesday

21 Which one of the following could be true )

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Rehearsals

(C) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Wednesday and the only workshop in session on Monday is the workshop on Staging

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday and the only workshop in session on Thursday is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshops on Lighting and Production are both in session on Wednesday

22 If the workshop on Production is in session on Wednesday which one of the following must be true)

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session on Monday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session on Thursday

(0) The workshop on Staging is in session on Monday

(E) The workshop on Staging is in session on Wednesday

23 If the workshop on production is the only workshop in session on Friday which one of the following must be false

(A) The workshop on Lighting is in session both on Tuesday and on Wednesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session both on Wednesday and on Thursday

(C) The workshop on Staging is in session both on Monday and on Tuesday

(0) The workshop on Lighting is in session on the same two days as is the workshop on Staging

(E) The workshop on Rehearsals is in session on a day when the workshop on Staging is also in session

24 If the workshop on Lighting is the only workshop in session on Monday which one of the following could be true

(A) The workshops on Rehearsals and Staging are both in session on Tuesday

(8) The workshop on Rehearsals is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(C) The workshop on Staging is the only workshop in session on Wednesday

(0) The workshops on Staging and Rehearsals are both in session on Wednesday and on Thursday

(E) The workshops on Staging and Production are both in session on Thursday

copy The Princeton Review Inc I 143

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 28: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT 5

Group Games~ Fixed Assignments Qyestions 1-5 3 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete

There are exactly five pieces of mail in a mailbox a flyer and accurate li st of the pieces of mail addressed to lana

a letter a magazine a postcard and a survey Each piece of mail is add ressed to exactly one of three housemates (A) the flyer the letter the magazine

Georgette Jana or Rini Each housemate has at least one of (B) the flyer the letter the postcard

the pieces of mail addressed to her The following conditions (C) the flyer the letter the survey

must apply (D) the flyer the magazine the postcard

Neither the letter nor the magazine is addressed to (E) the flyer the magazine the survey

Georgette If the letter is addressed to Rini then the postca rd is 4 Which one of the following CANNOT be a complete addressed to Jana and accurate list of the pieces of mail addressed to

The housemate to whom the flyer is addressed has at least Rini one of the other pieces of mail addressed to her as well

(A) the magazine the postcard (B) the letter the survey

1 Which one of the following could be a complete (C) the letter the magazine and accurate matching of the pieces of mail to the housemates to whom they are addressed

(D) (E)

the flyer the magazine the flyer the letter

(A) Georgette the flyer the survey J ana the letter 5 If the magazine and the survey are both addressed to the Rini the magazine same housemate then which one of the fo llowing could

(B) Georgette the flyer the postcard be true

(C)

(D)

1ana the letter the magazine Rini the survey Georgette the magazine the survey lana the fl yer the letter Rini the postcard Georgette the survey

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

The survey is addressed to Georgette The postcard is addressed to Rini The magazine is addressed to lana The letter is addressed to Rini The fl yer is addressed to l ana

lana the flyer the magazine Rini the letter the postcard

(E) Georgette the survey lana the letter the magazine the postcard Rini the flyer

2 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the pieces of mail anyone of which could be the only piece of mail addressed to lana

(A) the postcard (B) the letter the postcard (C) the letter the survey (D) the magazine the survey (E) the letter the magazine the postcard

copy The Princeton Review Inc 157

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 29: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT 5

~tions 6-12 8 Which one of the following must be true

A total of six books occupies three small shelves-one on the first shelf two on the second shelf and three on the third shelf Two of the books are grammars-one of Farsi the other of Hausa Two others are linguistics monographs-one on phonology the other on semantics The remaining two books are novels-one by Vonnegut the other by Woolf The books arrangement is consistent with the following

There is at least one novel on the same shelf as the Farsi grammar

The monographs are not both on the same shelf The Vonnegut novel is not on the same shelf as either

monograph

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate matching of the bookshelves to the books on each of them

(A) first shelf Hausa grammar second shelf semantics monograph Vonnegut novel

third shelf Farsi grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(B) first shelf semantics monograph second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology monograph Woolf novel

(C) first shelf Vonnegut novel second shelf phonology monograph Farsi grammar

third shelf Hausa grammar semantics monograph Woolf novel

(D) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf phonology and semantics monographs

third shelf Farsi and Hausa grammars Vonnegut novel

(E) first shelf Woolf novel second shelf Farsi grammar Vonnegut novel third shelf Hausa grammar phonology and semantics monographs

7 Which one of the following CANNOT be true

(A) A grammar is on the first shelf (B) A linguistics monograph is on the same shelf as

the Hausa grammar (C) A novel is on the first shelf (D) The novels are on the same shelf as each other (E) Neither linguistics monograph is on the first shelf

(A) A linguistics monograph and a grammar are on the second shelf

(B) A novel and a grammar are on the second shelf (C) At least one linguistics monograph and at least

one grammar are on the third shelf (D) At least one novel and at least one grammar are

on the third shelf (E) At least one novel and at least one linguistics

monograph are on the third shelf

9 If both grammars are on the same shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) A novel is on the first shelf (C) Both novels are on the second shelf (D) The Farsi grammar is on the second shelf (E) The phonology monograph is on the first shelf

10 Which one of the following must be true

(A) A linguistics monograph is on the first shelf (B ) No more than one novel is on each shelf (C) The Farsi grarrunar is not on the same shelf as the

Hausa grammar (D) The semantics monograph is not on the same

shelf as the Woolf novel lE) The Woolf novel is not on the first shelf

11 If the Farsi grammar is not on the third shelf which one of the following could be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the second shelf (B) The Hausa grammar is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the third shelf (D) The Vonnegut novel is on the third shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the second shelf

12 If the Hausa grammar and the phonology monograph are on the same shelf which one of the following must be true

(A) The phonology monograph is on the third shelf (B) The Vonnegut novel is on the second shelf (C) The semantics monograph is on the second shelf (D) The semantics monograph is on the first shelf (E) The Woolf novel is on the third shelf

copy The Princeton Review Inc 1 159

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 30: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

--

Group Games Fixed Assignments Ouestions 1-5

Each of nine students-Faith Gregory Harlan Jennifer Kenji Lisa Marcus Nari and Paul-will be assigned to exactly one of three panels Oceans Recycling and Wetlands Exactly three of the students will be assigned to each panel The assignment of students to panels must meet the following conditions

Faith is assigned to the same panel as Gregory Kenji is assigned to the same panel as Marcus Faith is not assigned to the same panel as Paul Gregory is not assigned to the same panel as Harlan Jennifer is not assigned to the same panel as Kenji Harlan is not assigned to the Oceans panel if Paul is not

assigned to the Oceans panel

I Which one of the following is an acceptable assignment of students to the panels)

(A) Oceans Faith Gregory Jennifer Recycling Kenji Lisa Nari Wetlands Harlan Marcus Paul

(B) Oceans Faith Jennifer Lisa Recycling Harlan Kenji Marcus Wetlands Gregory Nari Paul

(C) Oceans Harlan Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Jennifer Wetlands Lisa Nari Paul

(D) Oceans Jennifer Kenji Marcus Recycling Faith Gregory Nari Wetlands Harlan Lisa Paul

(E) Oceans Kenji Marcus Paul Recycling Harlan Jennifer Nari Wetlands Faith Gregory Lisa

2 If Marcus and Paul are both assigned to the Wetlands panel which one of the following must be true

(A) Harlan is assigned to the Recycling panel (B) Jennifer is assigned to the Oceans panel (C) Kenji is assigned to the Recycling panel (D) Lisa is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Nari is assigned to the Oceans panel

3 Which one of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other

(A) Faith and Harl an (B) Gregory and Paul (C) Harlan and Marcus (D) Faith and Marcus (E) Jennifer and Marcus

4 If Kenji and Paul are both assigned to the Recycling panel which one of the following could be true

(A) Faith is assigned to the Wetlands panel (B) Gregory is assigned to the Recycling panel (C) Harlan is assigned to the Oceans panel (D) Jennifer is assigned to the Wetlands panel (E) Lisa is assigned to the Recycling panel

5 Each of the following is a pair of students who could be assigned to the same panel as each other EXCEPT

(A) Gregory and Kenji (B) Gregory and Lisa (C) Kenji and Nari (D) Lisa and Marcus (E) Lisa and Paul

188 I copy The Princeton Review inc

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 31: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT 5

Questions 6-11

Each of five students-Hubert Lori Paul Regina and Sharon-will visit exactly one of three cities-Montreal Toronto or Vancouver-for the month of March according to the following conditions

Sharon visits a different city than Paul Hubert visits the same city as Regina Lori visits Montreal or else Toronto If Paul visits Vancouver Hubert visits Vancouver with

him Each student visits one of the cities with at least one of

the other four students

6 Which one of the following could be true for March

(A) Hubert Lori and Paul vi sit Toronto and Regina and Sharon visit Vancouver

(B ) Hubert Lori Paul and Regina visit Montreal and Sharon visits Vancouver

(C) Hubert Paul and Regina visit Toronto and Lori and Sharon visit Montreal

(D) Hubert Regina and Sharon visit Montreal and Lori and Paul visit Vancouver

(E) Lori Paul and Sharon visit Montreal and Hubert and Regina visit Toronto

7 If Hubert and Sharon visit a city together which one of the following could be true in March

(A) Hubert visits the same cit y as Paul (B) Lori visits the same city as Regina (C) Paul visits the same city as Regina (D) Paul visits Toronto (E) Paul visits Vancouver

8 If Sharon visits Vancouver which one of the following must be true for March

(A) Hubert visits Montreal (B) Lori visits Montreal (C) Paul visits Toronto (D ) Lori visits the same city as Paul (E) Lori visits the same city as Regina

9 Which one of the following could be false in March

(A) Sharon must visit Monrreal if Paul visilS Vancouver

(B) Regina must visit Vancouver if Paul vi sits Vancouvef

(e) Regina visits a city with exactly two of the other four students

(D) Lori visits a city with exactly one of the other four students

(E) Lori visits a city with Paul or else with Sharon

10 If Regina visits Toronro which one of lhe following could be true in March

(A) Lori visilS Toronto (B) Lori visits Vancouver (e) Paul visits Toronto (D) Paul visits Vancouver (E) Sharon visits Vancouver

11 Which one of the following must be true fOf March

(Al If any of the students visits Montreal Lori visits Montreal

(B) If any of the student s visits Montreal exactly two of them do

(e) If any of the studenrs visits Toronto exactly three of them do

(D) If any of the students visits Vancouver Paul vi si ts Vancouver

(E) If any of the students visits Vancouvef exactly three of them do

copy The Prnceton Revew Inc 1189

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 32: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

camp counselors-Fran Lewis Nathan and

one of three tennis and volleybalL The counselors must conform to the following conditions

Each

Neither Kathy nor tennis Neither Kathy nor Nathan the same activity as Joan

If both Nathan and

12 Which one of the is an acceptable of the counselors to the activities)

(A) Fran George Tennis Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan

Swimming Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Nathan

eC) Henry Tennis Fran Joan Lewis Volleyball Kathy Nathan Olga

(D) Joan Kathy Tennis George Fran Lewis

(E) Nathan Tennis Fran Kathy Lewis Volleyball Joan Olga

13 Which one of the following is a of counselors who could be two of three counselors assigned to supervise

(A) (8)

Joan and (D) Joan and -Iathan

Joan and

14 Which one of the following is a could be assigned to tennis)

Fran and Kathy (8) George and Nathan

15 If George and Kathy are two of three counselors _ to which one of the

following could be true of the

(Al Fran supervises tennis

volleyball volleyball

Inrt~CpC tennis

16 If Fran and Lewis are two of three counselors to swimming which one of the following must be true of the

CA) volleyball Henry supervises volleyball

(e) Joan (D) Kathy (E) Nathan

17 If Joan is to the same activity as which one of the following CANNOT be true of

the

(E) Nathan supervises tennis

190 I copy The PnncelOo Review Inc

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 33: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT5

Questions 18- 23

A newly for med company has five employees- F G H K and L Each employee holds exactl y one of the fo ll owing poshysitions pres ide nt manager or technician Only the president is not superv ised Other employees are each supervised by exactly one employee who is either th e pres ident or a manshyager Each supervi sed employee holds a d iffe re nt position th an hi s or her supervisor The following conditio ns apply

There is exactly one president At least one of the employees whom the president

super vises is a manager Each manager supervises at leas t one employee F does not supervise any employee G supervises exactly two employees

18 Which one of the following is an acceptable ass ignment of employees to the positions

President Manager Technic ian

(A) G H KL F (B) G H F K L (C) H F G K L (D ) H K G FL (E) K F G H L

19 Wh ich one of the following must be true

(A) There are at most three technici ans (B) There is exactly one technician (C) There are at least two managers (D) There are exactly two man agers (E) There are exactly two employees who supervise

no one

20 Which one of the following is a pair of employees who could serve as managers together

(A ) F H (B) F L (C) GK (D) G L (E) K L

21 Which one of the foll owing could be true

(A) T here is exactly one technician (B) There are exactly two managers (C) There are exactly two employees who are not

supervised (D) There are more managers than technicians (E) The president supervises all of the other

employees

22 If F is superv ised by the president which one of the followi ng must be uue

(A) G is the president (B) H is the pres id ent (C) L is a technician (D) There is exactly one manager (E) There are exactl y two technicians

23 If K supervises exactl y two employees which one of the following must be true

(A) F is supervised by K (B) G is a manager (C) L is supervised (D) There are exactly two managers (E) There are exactly two techni cians

copy The P(inCelOn ReView Inc I 191

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 34: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

--

lSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Games Determining the Best Diagram Questions 1-S

Exactly six of an artists paintings entitled Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Vale and Zelkova are sold at auction Three of the paintings are sold to a museum and three are sold to a private collector Two of the paintings are from the artists first (earliest) period two are from her second period and two are from her third (most recent) period The private collector and the museum each buy one painting from each period The following conditions hold

Sipapu which is sold to the private collector is from an earlier period than Zelko va which is sold to the museum

Quarterion is not from an earlier period than Tesseract Vale is from the artists second period

1 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the paintings bought by the museum and the private collector listed in order of the paintings periods from first to third

(A) museum Quarterion Vale Zelkova private collector Redemption Sipapu Tesseract

(B) museum Redemption Zelkova Quarterion private collector Sipapu Vale Tesseract

(e) museum Sipapu Zelkova Quarterion private collector Tesseract Vale Redemption

(D) museum Tesseract Quarterion Zelko va private collector Sipapu Redemption Vale

(E) museum Zelkova Tesseract Redemption private collector Sipapu Vale Quarterion

2 If Sipapu is from the artists second period which one of the following could be two of the three paintings bought by the private collector

(A) Quarterion and Zelkova (B) Redemption and Tesseract (e) Redemption and Vale (D) Redemption and Zelkova (E) Tesseract and Zelkova

3 Which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the paintings anyone of which could be the painting from the artists first period that is sold to the private collector

(Al Quarterion Redemption (B) Redemption Sipapu (e) Quarterion Sipapu Tesseract (D) Quarterion Redemption Sipapu Tesseract (E) Redemption Sipapu Tesseract Zelko va

4 If Sipapu is from the artists second period then which one of the following paintings could be from the period immediately preceding Quarterions period and be sold to the same buyer as Quarterion

(A) Redemption (B) Sipapu (e) Tesseract (D) Vale (E) Zelkova

S If Zelkova is sold to the same buyer as Tesseract and is from the period immediately preceding Tesseracts period then which one of the following must be true

(A) Quarterion is sold to the museum (B) Quarterion is from the artists third period (e) Redemption is sold to the private collector (D) Redemption is from the artists third period (E) Redemption is sold to the same buyer as Vale

212 I copy The Princeton ReView Inc

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 35: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT6

Ouestions 6-11 8 If Ortiz swims lap 4 then which one of the following could be true

A swim team with exactly five members-Jacobson Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz-swims a ten-lap relay race Each team member swims exactly two of the laps one swims laps 1 and 6 one swims laps 2 and 7 one swims laps 3 and 8 one swims laps 4 and 9 and one swims laps 5 and 10 The following conditions apply

Neither of Krugers laps is immediately before either of Lus

Jacobson does not swim lap 9 Ortizs first lap is after (but not necessarily immediately

after) Mi lIer s At least one of Jacobsons laps is immediately after one of Ortizs laps

6 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the first five laps in order from lap I through lap 5

(A) Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu Ortiz (8) Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson Lu (C) Lu Miller Jacobson Kruger Ortiz (D) Ortiz Kruger Miller Lu Jacobson (E) Miller Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Lu

7 If Jacobson swims lap 8 then for exactly how many of the ten laps can one detennine which team member swims the lap

(A) ten (8) eight (C) six (D) four (E) two

(A) Jacobson swims lap 1 (B) Jacobson swims lap 3 (C) Kruger swims lap 5 (D) Lu swi ms lap 3 (E) Miller swims lap 5

9 Which one of the following could be true

(A) Jacobson swims lap 4 (8) Kruger swims lap 5 (C) Lu swims lap 5 (D) Miller swi ms lap 10 (E) Ortiz sw ims lap 6

10 Jacobson CANNOT swim which one of the following laps

(A) lap I (8) lap 2 (C) lap 3 (D) lap 6 (E) lap 10

11 Which one of the following could be an accurate list of the swimmers of the last five laps in order from lap 6 through lap 10

(A) Jacobson Miller Kruger Ortiz Lu (8) Kruger Lu Miller Ortiz Jacobson (C) Lu Kruger Miller Ortiz Jacobson (D) Miller Kruger Ortiz Jacobson Lu (E) Ortiz Jacobson Kruger Miller Lu

copy The Princelon Review Inc I 213

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 36: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT6

Games Mixed Bag Ouestions 1-5

Doctor Yamata works only on Mondays Tuesdays Wednesshydays Fridays and Saturdays She performs four differshyent activities-lecturing operating treating patients and conducting research Each working day she performs exactly one activity in the morning and exactly one activity in the afternoon During each week her work schedule mu st satisfy the following restrictions

She performs operatiom on exactly three mornings If she operates on Monday she does not operate on

Tuesday She lectures in the afternoon on exactly two consecutive

calendar days She treats patients on exactly one morning and exactly

three afternoons She conducts research on exactly one morning On Saturday she neither lectures nor performs operations

1 Which one of the following must be a day on which Doctor Yamata lectures

(A) Monday (8) Tuesday (C) Wednesday (D) Friday (E) Saturday

2 On Wednesday Doctor Yamata could be scheduled to

(A) conduct research in the morning and operate in the afternoon

(8) lecture in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

(C) operate in the morning and lecture in the afternoon

(D) operate in the morning and conduct research in the afternoon

(E) treat patients in the morning and treat patients in the afternoon

3 Which one of the following statements must be true

(A) There is one day on which the doctor treats patients both in the morning and in the afternoon

(8) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she lectures

(e) The doctor conducts research on one of the days on which she treats patients

(D) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she treats patients

(E) The doctor lectures on one of the days on which she operates

4 If Doctor Yamata operates on Tuesday then her schedule for treating patients could be

(A) Monday morning Monday afternoon Friday morning Friday afternoon

(8) Monday morning Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

(e) Monday afternoon Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(D) Wednesday morning Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday afternoon

(E) Wednesday afternoon Friday afternoon Saturday morning Saturday afternoon

5 Which one of the following is a pair of days on both of which Doctor Yamata must treat patients

(A) Monday and Tuesday (8 ) Monday and Saturday (e) Tuesday and Friday (D) Tuesday and Saturday (E) Friday and Saturday

copy The Princeton ReView Inc I 231

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 37: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

--

LSAT 101 CORE CONCEPTS

Questions 6-12 9 If corsage 2 is exactl y the same as corsage 3 the ni ne flowers used in the corsages can include exactly

A florist is making three corsages from four types of flowers (A) two orchids

gardenias orchids roses and violets Each of the corsages (8) three gardenias

will contain exactly three flowers The nine flowers used in (C) three roses

the corsages must include at least one flower from each of the (D) fi ve roses

four types and at least twice as many roses as orchids must (E) five violets

be used The corsages must also meet the following specificashytions

10 If two of the corsages contain at least one orchid each Corsage 1 must contain exactly two types of flowers then the flowers in corsage 2 must include at least Corsage 2 must contain at least one rose

Corsage 3 must contain at least one gardenia but no (A) one gardenia and one orchid orchids (B) one gardenia and one rose

(C) one orchid and one rose 6 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of (D) one orchid and one violet

flowers for the three corsages (El one rose and one violet

Corsage I Corsage 2 Corsage 3 11 If the greatest possible number of violets is used in the

(A) 2 gardenias 1 orchid I gardenia three corsages the florist must use 1 rose 1 rose 1 orchid

(A) exactly one rose and exactly one gardenia1 violet 1 violet (8) exactly one orchid and exactly four violets

(8) 2 orchids 2 orchids 2 gardenias (Cl exactly two orchids 1 rose I rose 1 rose (D) exactly two roses

(C) 2 orchids 3 roses I gardenia (E) exactly six violets 1 rose 2 violets

12 If corsage I contains at least one gardenia and at least one violet and if corsage 3 contains three different

(D) 1 gardenia 1 gardenia 1 gardenia J orchid I rose I rose

rose J violet I violet types of flowers which one of the following could be used to make corsage 2

(E) orchid 3 violets 3 gardenias 2 roses (A) one rose one orchid and one gardenia

(8) one rose and two orchids (C) one rose and two violets 7 The maximum total number of roses that can be used in (D) two roses and one gardenia the three corsages is (E) two roses and one violet

(A) three (8) four (C) five (D) six (E) seven

8 If corsage I contains two orchids and one rose what is the maximum total number of violets that the florist can use in making the three corsages

(A) one (8) two (C) three (D) four (E) fi ve

232 I copy The Princeton Revie w Inc

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 38: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNIT 6

Questions 13-17

Three boys-Karl Luis and Miguel-and three girls-Rita Sarah and Tura-are giving a dance recital Three dancesshy1 2 and 3-are to be performed Each dance involves three pairs of children a boy and a girl partnering each other in each pair according to the following conditions

Karl partners Sarah in either dance 1 or dance 2 Whoever partners Rita in dance 2 must partner Sarah in

dance 3 No two children can partner each other in more than one

dance

13 If Sarah partners Luis in dance 3 which one of the following is a complete and accurate list of the girls any one of whom could partner Miguel in dance 1

(A) Rita (B) Sarah (e) Tura (D) Rita Sarah (E) Rita Tura

14 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 2 which one of the following could be true

(A) Karl partners TUfa in dance 1 (B) Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 (e) Luis partners Sarah in dance 3 (D) Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 (E) Miguel partners Tura in dance 3

IS If Miguel partners Sarah in dance 1 which one of [he following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 3

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Tura

16 If Luis partners Sarah in dance 2 which one of the following is a pair of children who must partner each other in dance 1

(A) Karl and Rita (B) Karl and Tura (e) Luis and Rita (D) Luis and Tura (E) Miguel and Rita

17 If Miguel partners Rita in dance 1 which one of the following must be true

(A) Karl partners Rita in dance 2 (B) Karl partners Sarah in dance 3 (e) Karl partners Tura in dance 1 (D) Luis partners Rita in dance 2 (E) Luis partners Tura in dance 3

copy The Princeton Review Jnc 233

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 39: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

lSAT 101 GORE CONCEPTS

On the basis of an examination nIne Ida Jan Laura Mike and Nick-are each in one of three classes The three highest scorers are in the level 1 class the three lowest scorers are

in the level 3 class The three are in the level 2 class Each class has exactly three students

Ida scores higher than Glen Glen scores than both Jan and Kathy Jan scores higher than Mike Mike scores higher than Hilary Hilary scores than Nick Kathy scores hi2her than both Fred and Laura

18 How many different combinations of students could form the level 1 class

(A) one two

(C) three (D) four (El six

19 Which one of the following students could be in the level 2 class but cannot be in the level 3 class

Fred Glen Jan

(E) Nick

20 Which one of the students could be placed in anyone of the three classes

(A) Fred (B) Jan

Kathy Laura

(E) Mike

21 The composition of each class can be completely determined jf which one of the following pairs of students is known to be in the level 2 class

Fred and (B) Fred and Mike

and Jan and Laura

(E) Laura and Mike

22 Which one of the following of students cannot be in the same class as Fred

Hilary and Nick Jan and Laura

(C) Kathy and Laura Jan and Mike

(El Laura and Mike

234 I copy The Princeton Review Inc

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235

Page 40: Class 7 Logic Puzzles

UNfT6

Questions 23-28

A soloist will play six different guitar concertos exactly one each Sunday for six consecutive weeks Two concertos will be selected from among three concertos by Giuliani-H J and K two from among four concertos by Rodrigo-M N 0 and P and two from among three concertos by Vivaldi -X Y and Z The following conditions apply without exception

If N is selected then J is a lso selected If M is selec ted then neither J nor 0 can be selected If X is selected then neither Z nor P can be selected If both J and 0 are selected then J is played at some

time before O X cannot be played on the fifth Sunday unless one of

Rodrigos concertos is played on the first Sunday

23 Which one of the following is an acceptable selection of concertos that the soloist could play on the first through the sixth Sunday)

1 l 1 1 5 Q

(A) H Z M N Y K (8 ) K J Y 0 Z N (C) K Y P J Z M (D ) p Y J H X 0 (E) X N K 0 J Z

24 If the six concertos to be played are J K N 0 Y and Z and if N is to be played on the first Sunday then which one of the following concertos CANNOT be played on the second Sunday )

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

25 If J 0 and Yare the first three concertos to be pl ayed not necessarily in the order given which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be pl ayed on the fi fth Sunday)

(A) H (8 ) K (C) N (D) P (E) X

26 If 0 is selected for the first Sunday which one of the following is a concerto th at must also be selected

(A ) J (8) K (C) M (D) N (E) X

27 Which one of the following is a concerto that must be selected

(A) J (8 ) K (C) 0 (D) Y (E) Z

28 Which one of the following is a concerto that CANNOT be selected together with N

(A ) M (8) 0 (C) P (D) X (E) Z

copy The Prince ton Review Inc I 235